Home

TP-LINK TL-SG3424P network switch

1. Time Config O Manual Date Time 44 Get GMT Time Zone GMT 08 00 Beijing Hong Kong Perth Singapore v Primary Sever 133 100 9 2 Secondary Sever 139 78 100 163 O Synchronize with PC s Clock DST Config DST Status Disable v Start Time 04 End Time fai fc Figure 4 5 System Time The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Time Info Current System Date Displays the current date and time of the switch Current Time Source Displays the current time source of the switch gt Time Config Manual When this option is selected you can set the date and time manually Get GMT When this option is selected you can configure the time zone and the IP Address for the NTP Server The switch will get GMT automatically if it has connected to a NTP Server e Time Zone Select your local time e Primary Secondary NTP Server Enter the IP Address for the NTP Server Synchronize with When this option is selected the administrator PC s clock is PC S Clock utilized gt DST Config DST Status Enable or Disable DST Start Time Select the Start Time of DST End Time Select the End Time of DST 15 n ote When Get GMT is selected and the switch failed to get time from the configured time server the switch will change to get time from the latest time server from which you got time successfully or from the public time server in
2. Figure 13 11 Alarm Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Alarm Table Select Index Variable Port Sample Type Rising Threshold Rising Event Falling Threshold Falling Event Alarm Type Select the desired entry for configuration Displays the index number of the entry Select the alarm variables from the pull down list Select the port on which the Alarm entry acts Specify the sampling method for the selected variable and comparing the value against the thresholds e Absolute Compares the values directly with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval e Delta Subtracts the last sampled value from the current value The difference in the values is compared to the threshold Enter the rising counter value that triggers the Rising Threshold alarm Select the index of the corresponding event which will be triggered if the sampled value is larger than the Rising Threshold Enter the falling counter value that triggers the Falling Threshold alarm Select the index of the corresponding event which will be triggered if the sampled value is lower than the Falling Threshold Specify the type of the alarm e All The alarm event will be triggered either the sampled value exceeds the Rising Threshold or is under the Falling Threshold e Rising When the sampled value exceeds the Rising Threshold an alarm event is triggered e Falling When the s
3. O 7 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes O 8 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes O 9 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes O 10 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes O 11 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes O VE Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes O 13 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes O 14 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes O 15 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes Fi 16 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes ER vi Note 802 1X can not be enabled for LAG member Figure 12 21 Port Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Config Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select Select your desired port for configuration It is multi optional 172 Port Displays the port number Status Select Enable Disable the 802 1X authentication feature for the port Guest VLAN Select Enable Disable the Guest VLAN feature for the port Control Mode Specify the Control Mode for the port e Auto In this mode the port will normally work only after passing the 802 1X Authentication e Force Authorized In this mode the port can work normally without passing the 802 1X Authentication e Force Unauthorized In this mode the port is forbidden working for its fixed unauthorized status Control Type Specify the Control Type for the port e MAC Based Any client connected to the port should pass the 802 1X
4. Figure 8 5 Port Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Config Port Select Select Port IGMP Snooping Fast Leave LAG n ote Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select the desired port for IGMP Snooping feature configuration It is multi optional Displays the port of the Switch Select Enable Disable IGMP Snooping for the desired port Select Enable Disable Fast Leave feature for the desired port If Fast Leave is enabled for a port the Switch will immediately remove this port from the multicast group upon receiving IGMP leave messages Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to 1 Fast Leave on the port is effective only when the host supports IGMPv2 or IGMPv3 2 When both Fast Leave feature and Unknown Multicast Discard feature are enabled the leaving of a user connected to a port owning multi user will result in the other users intermitting the multicast business 8 1 3 VLAN Config Multicast groups established by IGMP Snooping are based on VLANs On this page you can configure different IGMP parameters for different VLANs Choose the menu Multicast IGMP Snooping VLAN Config to load the following page 98 VLAN Config VLAN ID Router Port Time Member Port Time Leave Time Static Router Port VLAN Table Select LAN ID O O 1 O 2 O 3 Note 1 4094 sec 60 60
5. In this User Guide the tagged packet refers to the packet with VLAN tag whereas the untagged packet refers to the packet without VLAN tag and the priority tagged packet refers to the packet with VLAN tag whose VLAN ID is 0 gt Link Types of ports When creating the 802 1Q VLAN you should set the link type for the port according to its connected device The link types of port including the following three types 1 ACCESS The ACCESS port can be added in a single VLAN and the egress rule of the port is UNTAG The PVID is same as the current VLAN ID If the ACCESS port is added to another VLAN it will be removed from the current VLAN automatically 52 2 3 gt TRUNK The TRUNK port can be added in multiple VLANs and the egress rule of the port is TAG The TRUNK port is generally used to connect the cascaded network devices for it can receive and forward the packets of multiple VLANs When the packets are forwarded by the TRUNK port its VLAN tag will not be changed GENERAL The GENERAL port can be added in multiple VLANs and set various egress rules according to the different VLANs The default egress rule is UNTAG The PVID can be set as the VID number of any VLAN the port belongs to PVID PVID Port Vlan ID is the default VID of the port When the switch receives an un VLAN tagged packet it will add a VLAN tag to the packet according to the PVID of its received port and forward the packets When creating VLAN
6. Select the user priority contained in the rule for the tagged packets to match Select the time range for the rule to take effect 137 11 2 4 Standard IP ACL Standard IP ACLs analyze and process data packets based on a series of match conditions which can be the source IP addresses and destination IP addresses carried in the packets Choose the menu ACL gt ACL Config Standard IP ACL to load the following page Create Standard IP Rule ACLID Standard IP ACL v Rule ID Operation Permit O s P Mask O pr Mask Time Range No Limit vi Figure11 7 Create Standard IP Rule The following entries are displayed on this screen gt 11 2 5 Extend IP ACL Create Standard IP ACL ACL ID Rule ID Operation S IP D IP Mask Time Range Select the desired Standard IP ACL for configuration Enter the rule ID Select the operation for the switch to process packets which match the rules e Permit Forward packets Deny Discard Packets Enter the source IP address contained in the rule Enter the destination IP address contained in the rule Enter IP address mask If it is set to 1 it must strictly match the address Select the time range for the rule to take effect Extend IP ACLs analyze and process data packets based on a series of match conditions which can be the source IP addresses destination IP addresses IP protocol and
7. System Name TLV The System Name TLV allows network management to advertise the system s assigned name which should be the system s fully qualified domain name Management Address TLV The Management Address TLV identifies an address associated with the local LLDP agent that may be used to reach higher entities to assist discovery by network management Port VLAN ID TLV The Port VLAN ID TLV allows a VLAN bridge port to advertise the port s VLAN identifier PVID that will be associated with untagged or priority tagged frames Port And Protocol VLAN ID TLV The Port And Protocol VLAN ID TLV allows a bridge port to advertise a port and protocol VLAN ID VLAN Name TLV The VLAN Name TLV allows an IEEE 802 1Q compatible IEEE 802 LAN station to advertise the assigned name of any VLAN with which it is configured Link Aggregation TLV The Link Aggregation TLV indicates whether the link is capable of being aggregated whether the link is currently in an aggregation and if in an aggregation the port identification of the aggregation MAC PHY Configuration Status TLV The MAC PHY Configuration Status TLV identifies a The duplex and bit rate capability of the sending IEEE 802 3 LAN node that is connected to the physical medium b The current duplex and bit rate settings of the sending IEEE 802 3 LAN node c Whether these settings are the result of auto negotiation during link initiation or of manual set overr
8. ES Outlook Express Remote Assistance Windows Media Player 3 Windows Messenger 8 Windows Movie Maker T Activate Windows IxChariot E Asmax gt E LogMeTT Tera Term Microsoft Office Macrovision A TP LINK gt E OvisLink gt Bor Orro E Calculator EM Command Prompt E Notepad W Paint Program Compatibility Wizard Y Synchronize Tour Windows XP Q Windows Explorer A WordPad 3 Remote Desktop Connection Wireless Network Setup Wizard Figure C 2 Open Hyper Terminal 2 The Connection Description Window will prompt shown as the following figure Enter a name into the Name field and click OK Connection Description Y New Connection Enter a name and choose an icon for the connection A tp ink Mcss 3eur Figure C 3 Connection Description 3 Select the port to connect in the figure below and click OK 236 Connect To D tp link Enter details for the phone number that you want to dial Country region Area code Phone number Connect using v Figure C 4Select the port to connect 4 Configure the port selected in the step above shown as the following figure Configure Bits per second as 38400 Data bits as 8 Parity as None Stop bits as 1 Flow control as None and then click OK COM1 Properties jeanne Port Settings Bits per second Data bits I Parity
9. Member Displays the member of the protocol group Operation Click the Edit button to modify the settings of the entry And click the Modify button to apply your settings 6 3 2 Protocol Group On this page you can create Protocol VLAN and view the information of the current defined Protocol VLANs Choose the menu VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Protocol Group to load the following page 62 Protocol Group Config Protocol IP Ethernet ll 0800 VLAN ID 1 4094 Protocol Group Member O 1 M2 Fi 3 O 4 Os O 6 O 7 Os O a O10 11 O12 O13 C14 O15 O16 O17 Cis O19 C20 Cat C22 C23 C24 Figure 6 9 Create Protocol VLAN The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Protocol Group Config Protocol Select the defined protocol template VLAN ID Enter the ID number of the Protocol VLAN This VLAN should be one of the 802 1Q VLANs the ingress port belongs to gt Protocol Group Member Select your desired port for Protocol VLAN Group 6 3 3 Protocol Template The Protocol Template should be created before configuring the Protocol VLAN By default the switch has defined the IP Template ARP Template RARP Template etc You can add more Protocol Template on this page Choose the menu VLAN gt Protocol VLAN Protocol Template to load the following page 63 Create Protocol Template Protocol Name 8 characters maximum Ether Type 4 Hex integers Frame Type Ethernet Il bi P
10. 15 1 1 Neighbor Info On this page you can view the NDP neighbor information of the switch Choose the menu Cluster NDP Neighbor Info to load the following page 207 Neighbor Search Search Option All x Neighbor Info Native Port Remote Port Device Name Device MAC Firmware version Aging Time sec Port 02 Port14 TL SL5428E 00 04 E8 00 00 49 O71 Build 20100204 176 Rel 53016 Figure 15 2 Neighbor Information The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Neighbor Search Option Select the information the desired entry should contain and then click the Search button to display the desired entry in the following Neighbor Information table gt Neighbor Info Native Port Displays the port number of the switch Remote Port Displays the port number of the neighbor switch which is connected to the corresponding port Device Name Displays the name of the neighbor switch Device MAC Displays MAC address of the neighbor switch Firmware Version Displays the firmware version of the neighbor switch Aging Time Displays the period for the switch s to keep the NDP packets from the neighbor switch 15 1 2 NDP Summary On this page you can view the NDP configuration of the switch Choose the menu Cluster NDP NDP Summary to load the following page 208 Global Config NDP Disable Aging Time 180 sec Hello Time 60 sec Port Status Send NDP Receive NDP Error NDP l Port NDP Packets Packets Packet
11. Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select the desired port for STP configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number of the switch Select Enable Disable STP function for the desired port Enter a value from 0 to 240 divisible by 16 Port priority is an important criterion on determining if the port connected to this port will be chosen as the root port The lower value has the higher priority ExtPath Cost is used to choose the path and calculate the path costs of ports in different MST regions lt is an important criterion on determining the root port The lower value has the higher priority IntPath Cost is used to choose the path and calculate the path costs of ports in an MST region It is an important criterion on determining the root port The lower value has the higher priority Select Enable Disable Edge Port The edge port can transit its state from blocking to forwarding rapidly without waiting for forward delay Select the P2P link status If the two ports in the P2P link are root port or designated port they can transit their states to forwarding rapidly to reduce the unnecessary forward delay Select Enable to perform MCheck operation on the port Unchange means no MCheck operation Displays the STP version of the port Displays the role of the port played in the STP Instance e Root Port Indicates the port that has the lowest path cost
12. PoE Holiday Create to load the following page Create Holiday Start Date End Date Holiday Name Holiday Table Select Index O 1 O 2 u Mlun vw Cu OCE Holiday Name Start Date End Date NewYearDay 01 01 01 01 LaborDay 05 01 05 03 Al Figure 10 5 Holiday Configuration The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Holiday Start Date End Date Holiday Name gt Holiday Table Select Index Holiday Name Start Date Specify the start date of the holiday Specify the end date of the holiday Enter the name of the holiday Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding holiday Displays the index of the holiday Displays the name of the holiday Displays the start date of the holiday 131 End Date Displays the end date of the holiday Return to CONTENTS 132 Chapter 11 ACL ACL Access Control List is used to filter packets by configuring match rules and process policies of packets in order to control the access of the illegal users to the network Besides ACL functions to control traffic flows and save network resources It provides a flexible and secured access control policy and facilitates you to control the network security On this switch ACLs classify packets based on a series of match conditions which can be L2 L4 protocol key fields carried in the packets A time range based ACL enables you to implement ACL control over packets by d
13. UNTAG the packet will be forwarded after removing its VLAN tag Table 6 1 Relationship between Port Types and VLAN Packets Processing 53 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN function is implemented on the VLAN Config and Port Config pages 6 1 1 VLAN Config On this page you can view the current created 802 1Q VLAN Choose the menu VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config to load the following page VLAN Table WANID Select VLAN ID Description Members Operation O 1 Default VLAN 1 24 Edit Detail Total VLAN 1 Figure 6 3 VLAN Table To ensure the normal communication of the factory switch the default VLAN of all ports is set to VLAN1 The Web Management Page of switch can only be accessed through the ports in VLAN1 VLAN1 can not be modified or deleted The following entries are displayed on this screen gt VLAN Table VLAN ID Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding entry based on the VLAN ID number you entered Select Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding VLAN It is multi optional VLAN ID Displays the ID number of VLAN Description Displays the user defined description of VLAN Members Displays the port members in the VLAN Operation Allows you to view or modify the information for each entry e Edit Click to modify the settings of VLAN e Detail Click to get the information of VLAN Click Edit button to modify the settings of the corresponding VLAN Click Create button to creat
14. which results in a breakdown of the normal communication gt Man In The Middle Attack The attacker continuously sends the false ARP packets to the Hosts in LAN so as to make the Hosts maintain the wrong ARP table When the Hosts in LAN communicate with one another they will send the packets to the attacker according to the wrong ARP table Thus the attacker can get and process the packets before forwarding them During the procedure the communication packets information between the two Hosts are stolen in the case that the Hosts were unaware of the attack That is called Man In The Middle Attack The Man In The Middle Attack is illustrated in the following figure 159 HostA Host B IP 192 168 0 101 IP 192 168 0 102 MAC 00 00 00 11 11 11 MAC 00 00 00 22 22 22 3 Host A updates its ARP table 4 Host B updates its ARP table The original ARP entry of Host B A The original ARP entry of Host A 192 168 0 102 00 00 00 22 22 22 4 192 168 0 101 00 00 00 11 11 11 is updated to is updated to 192 168 0 102 00 00 00 33 33 33 192 168 0 101 00 00 00 33 33 33 1 Attacker sends the fake ARP packets of Host B with a forged MAC address 00 00 00 33 33 33 to Host A 2 Attacker sends the fake ARP packets of Host A with a forged MAC address 00 00 00 33 33 33 to Host B Attacker IP 192 168 0 103 MAC 00 00 00 33 33 33 Figure 12 12 Man In The Middle Attack Suppose there are three Hosts in LAN connected with one another throug
15. 2 Up to 5 IP Ranges can be bound to one port Please input the Bound IP Range ID in the format like 1 5 8 Figure 8 11 Port Filter The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Filter Config Port Select Select Port Filter Action Mode Bound IP Range ID Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select the desired port for multicast filtering It is multi optional Displays the port number Select Enable Disable multicast filtering feature on the port Select the action mode to process multicast packets when the multicast IP is in the filtering IP range Permit Only the multicast packets whose multicast IP is in the IP range will be processed e Deny Only the multicast packets whose multicast IP is not in the IP range will be processed Enter the IP rang ID the port will be bound to 107 Max Groups Specify the maximum number of multicast groups to prevent some ports taking up too much bandwidth LAG Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to aan ote 1 Multicast Filter feature can only have effect on the VLAN with IGMP Snooping enabled 2 Multicast Filter feature has no effect on static multicast IP 3 Up to 5 IP Ranges can be bound to one port Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Configure IP Range Required Configure IP Range to be filtered on Multicast Multicast
16. Choose the menu System Access Security Access Control to load the following page Access Control Config Control Mode Disable v IP Address j Mask MAC Address Port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 g 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Session Config Session Timeout 10 min 5 30 Access User Number Number Control Enable Disable Admin Number 1 16 Guest Number 0 15 Figure 4 14 Access Control The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Access Control Config Control Mode Select the control mode for users to log on to the Web management page e IP based Select this option to limit the IP range of the users for login e MAC based Select this option to limit the MAC Address of the users for login e Port based Select this option to limit the ports for login IP Address amp Mask These fields can be available for configuration only when IP based mode is selected Only the users within the IP range you set here are allowed for login MAC Address The field can be available for configuration only when MAC based mode is selected Only the user with this MAC Address you set here is allowed for login Port The field can be available for configuration only when Port based mode is selected Only the users connected to these ports you set here are allowed for login gt Session Config 22 Session Timeout If you do nothing with the Web management page within the
17. Displays the description of LAG Displays the LAG member Allows you to view or modify the information for each LAG e Edit Click to modify the settings of the LAG e Detail Click to get the information of the LAG Click the Detail button for the detailed information of your selected LAG 37 Detail Info Group Number LAG1 LAG Type Static Port Status Enable Rate Auto Port mirror Disable Ingress Bandwidth bps Egress Bandwidth bps Broadcast Control bps Multicast Control bps UL Control bps QoS Priority CoS 0 Join VLAN 1 Figure 5 7 Detail Information 5 2 2 Static LAG On this page you can manually configure the LAG The LACP feature is disabled for the member ports of the manually added Static LAG Choose the menu Switching gt LAG gt Static LAG to load the following page LAG Config Group Number LAG1 v Description 16 letters maximum Member Port O14 Fi gt Da O a Os O 6 O 7 O e Og O10 O11 O12 113 C14 O15 O16 017 O18 Ora O 20 O21 122 O23 O24 Apply Note 1 LAG denotes the Link Aggregation Group which the port belongs to 2 It s not suggested to set 100M and 1000M ports in the same LAG 3 The LAG created by LACP cant be modified Figure 5 8 Manually Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt LAG Config 38 Group Number Select a Group Number for the LAG Description Give a description to the LAG for identificatio
18. Enable Disable 180 sec 5 255 default 180 60 sec 6 254 default 60 NDP Select Port NDP Enable FF 2 Enable Enable O 4 Enable Enable O 6 Enable Enable O 8 Enable Enable O 10 Enable Enable O 12 Enable Enable O 14 Enable Enable O 16 Enable Enable O 18 Enable Enable O 20 Enable Enable O 22 Enable Enable O 2 Enable 4 Figure 15 4 NDP Config The following entries are displayed on this screen Global Cofig gt NDP Aging Time Hello Time Port Config Select Port NDP Select Enable Disable NDP function globally Enter the period for the neighbor switch to keep the NDP packets from this switch Enter the interval to send NDP packets Select the desired port to configure its NDP status Displays the port number of the switch Displays NDP status of the current port 210 Enable Click the Enable button to enable NDP for the port you select Disable Click the Disable button to disable NDP for the port you select aan ote 1 NDP function is effective only when NDP function is enabled globally and for the port 2 The aging time should be set over the hello time value otherwise the neighbor information table of NDP ports will be unstable 15 2 NTDP NTDP Neighbor Topology Discovery Protocol is used for the commander switch to collect NDP information NTDP transmits and forwards NTDP topology collection request based on NDP neighbor information table and collects the N
19. Enable Disable the SNMP function Specify the switch s Engine ID for the remote clients The Engine ID is a unique alphanumeric string used to identify the SNMP engine on the Switch Specify the Remote Engine ID for switch The Engine ID is a unique alphanumeric string used to identify the SNMP engine on the remote device which receives traps and informs from switch 177 n ote The amount of Engine ID characters must be even 13 1 2 SNMP View The OID Object Identifier of the SNMP packets is used to describe the managed objects of the switch and the MIB Management Information Base is the set of the OIDs The SNMP View is created for the SNMP management station to manage MIB objects Choose the menu SNMP SNMP Config SNMP View to load the following page View Config View Name 16 characters maximum MIB Object ID 61 characters maximum View Type Include Exclude View Table Select View Name View Type MIB Object ID O viewDefault Include 1 O viewDefault Exclude 1 3 6 1 6 3 15 O viewDefault Exclude 1 3 6 1 6 3 16 O viewDefault Exclude 1 3 6 1 6 3 18 Al Figure 13 4 SNMP View The following entries are displayed on this screen gt View Config View Name MIB Object ID View Type gt View Table Select View Name View Type MIB Object ID Give a name to the View for identification Each View can include several entries with the same name Enter the Object Identif
20. If the connections of one or several ports are broken the traffic of these ports will be transmitted on the normal ports so as to guarantee the connection reliability Depending on different aggregation modes aggregation groups fall into two types Static LAG and LACP Config The LAG function is implemented on the LAG Table Static LAG and LACP Config configuration pages 5 2 1 LAG Table On this page you can view the information of the current LAG of the switch Choose the menu Switching gt LAG gt LAG Table to load the following page 36 Global Config Hash Algorithm SRC MAC DST MAC wv Apply LAG Table Group Number O LAGI Select Note Description All Member Operation 1 2 Edit Detail 1 The LAG created by LACP cant be deleted Figure 5 6 LAG Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config Aggregate Arithmetic gt LAG Table Select Group Number Description Member Operation Select the applied scope of Aggregate Arithmetic which results in choosing a port to transfer the packets e SRC MAC DST MAC When this option is selected the Aggregate Arithmetic will apply to the source and destination MAC addresses of the packets e SRC IP DST IP When this option is selected the Aggregate Arithmetic will apply to the source and destination IP addresses of the packets Select the desired LAG It is multi optional Displays the LAG number here
21. Index Start Time End Time Delete n ote Figure 10 4 Time Range Create To successfully configure time ranges please firstly specify time slices and then time ranges The following items are displayed on this screen gt Create Time Range Name Exclude Holiday Absolute Week gt Create Time Slice Enter the name of the time range for time identification Select Exclude Holiday and the port based on this time range may not supply power when the system time is within the holiday Select Absolute to configure absolute time range The port based on this time range will supply power based on this time range when the system time is within the absolute time range Select Week to configure week time range The port based on this time range will supply power based on this time range when the system time is within the week time range 130 Start Time End Time gt Time Slice Table Index Start Time End Time Delete Set the start time of the time slice Set the end time of the time slice Displays the index of the time slice Displays the start time of the time slice Displays the end time of the time slice Click the Delete button to delete the corresponding time slice 10 2 3 PoE Holiday Config Holiday mode is applied as a different secured access control policy from the week mode On this page you can define holidays according to your work arrangement Choose the menu PoE gt PoE Time Range
22. Mirror Group Number 1 v Mirroring Port Mirroring Port Disable v Mirrored Port Port CEEE Select Port Ingress Egress LAG O 1 Disable Disable B O 2 Disable Disable E O 3 Disable Disable nn O 4 Disable Disable O 5 Disable Disable a O 6 Disable Disable e 14 O 7 Disable Disable O 8 Disable Disable z O 9 Disable Disable En O 10 Disable Disable E O 11 Disable Disable O 12 Disable Disable v Figure 5 3 Mirroring Port The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Mirror Group Number Select the mirror group number you want to configure gt Mirroring Port Mirroring Port Select the mirroring port number 32 gt Mirrored Port Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select Select the desired port as a mirrored port It is multi optional Port Displays the port number Ingress Select Enable Disable the Ingress feature When the Ingress is enabled the incoming packets received by the mirrored port will be copied to the mirroring port Egress Select Enable Disable the Egress feature When the Egress is enabled the outgoing packets sent by the mirrored port will be copied to the mirroring port LAG Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to The LAG member can not be selected as the mirrored port or mirroring port Mnete 1 The LAG member can not be selected as the mirrored port o
23. Saving Config Logout Figure 3 3 Main Setup Menu Anote Clicking Apply can only make the new configurations effective before the switch is rebooted If you want to keep the configurations effective even the switch is rebooted please click Saving Config You are suggested to click Saving Config before cutting off the power or rebooting the switch to avoid losing the new configurations Return to CONTENTS 11 Chapter 4 System The System module is mainly for system configuration of the switch including four submenus System Info User Manage System Tools and Access Security 4 1 System Info The System Info mainly for basic properties configuration can be implemented on System Summary Device Description System Time and System IP pages 4 1 1 System Summary On this page you can view the port connection status and the system information The port status diagram shows the working status of 24 10 100 1000Mbps RJ45 ports and 4 SFP ports of the switch The ports labeled as numbers are 10 100 1000Mbps ports the ports labeled as SFP are SFP ports Choose the menu System System Info System Summary to load the following page 22F 24F 2i 23E System Info System Description 24 Port Gigabit L2 Managed PoE Switch with 4 Combo SFP Slots Device Name TL SG3424P Device Location SHENZHEN System Contact www to link com Hardware Version TL 563424P 1 0 Firmware Version 0 3 3 Build 20111215 Rel 39908 IP Add
24. Stop bits Flow control Figure C 5 Port Settings 3 Download Firmware via bootUtil menu To download firmware to the switch via FTP function you need to enter into the bootUtil menu of the switch and take the following steps 1 Connect the console port of the PC to the console port of the switch and open hyper terminal Connect FTP server to port 1 of the switch 2 Power off and restart the switch When you are prompted that Press CTRL B to enter the bootUtil in the hyper terminal please press CTRL B key to enter into bootUtil menu shown as the following figure 237 help print this list reboot reboot the system ifconfig config the interface ftp config the remote host ip the user name user password and the image file name upgrade upgrade the firmware start start the system reset reset the system to the factory config JE PE JE JE JE DE JE JE PE DE JE JE JE IE PE JE HE HE JE JE JE PE HE E PE HE JE PEHE ME HE HE E JE IE JE HE HE HE PE E JE HE HE HE TP LINK BOOTUTIL v1 0 0 x JE HEHE FEE FE EE IE E JE JE JEJE PE ME DEE DEE EE HE ME PEE JE JEME ME ME HEME JE MEJE HE HE ME IEE JE HEHE ME Copyright c 2011 TP LINK Tech Co Ltd Create Date May 17 2011 16 40 15 Figure C 6 bootUtil Menu As the prompt is displayed for a short time you are suggested not to release the CTRL B key until you enter into bootUtil menu after powering on the switch 3 4 5 6 7 Afte
25. Trusted Port Trusted Port n ote Enable Disable the ARP Detect function and click the Apply button to apply Select the port for which the ARP Detect function is unnecessary as the Trusted Port The specific ports such as up linked port routing port and LAG port should be set as Trusted Port To ensure the normal communication of the switch please configure the ARP Trusted Port before enabling the ARP Detect function ARP Detect and ARP Defend cannot be enabled at the same time 161 Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Bind the IP address MAC Required On the IP MAC Binding page bind the IP address VLAN ID and the address MAC address VLAN ID and the connected Port connected Port number of number of the Host together via Manual Binding ARP the Host together Scanning or DHCP Snooping 2 Enable the protection for the Required On the Network Security IP MAC bound entry Binding Binding Table page specify a protect type for the corresponding bound entry 3 Specify the trusted port Required On the Network Security gt ARP Inspection ARP Detect page specify the trusted port The specific ports such as up linked port routing port and LAG port should be set as Trusted Port 4 Enable ARP Detect feature Required On the Network Security ARP Inspection ARP Detect page enable the ARP Detect feature 12 2 2 ARP Defend With the ARP Defend
26. clear up the dynamic multicast addresses in multicast address table and learn new addresses 8 2 2 Static Multicast IP Static Multicast IP table isolated from dynamic multicast group and multicast filter is not learned by IGMP Snooping It can enhance the quality and security for information transmission in some fixed multicast groups 104 Choose the menu Multicast Multicast IP Static Multicast IP to load the following page Create Static Multicast Multicast IP Format 225 0 0 1 VLAN ID 41 4094 Forward Port Format 1 3 6 8 Search Option Search Option All Static Multicast IP Table Select Multicast IP VLAN ID Forward Port Al Total Static Multicast IP 0 Figure 8 9 Static Multicast IP Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Static Multicast Multicast IP Enter static multicast IP address VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID of the multicast IP Forward Port Enter the forward port of the multicast group gt Search Option Search Option Select the rules for displaying multicast IP table to find the desired entries quickly All Displays all static multicast IP entries e Multicast IP Enter the multicast IP address the desired entry must carry VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID the desired entry must carry e Port Enter the port number the desired entry must carry gt Static Multicast IP Table Select Select the desired entry to delete the co
27. it will then send feedbacks through a RADIUS Access Accept packet and an EAP Success packet to the switch to indicate that the supplicant system is authorized 7 The switch changes the state of the corresponding port to accepted state to allow the supplicant system access the network And then the switch will monitor the status of supplicant by sending hand shake packets periodically By default the switch will force the supplicant to log off if it can not get the response from the supplicant for two times 8 The supplicant system can also terminate the authenticated state by sending EAPOL Logoff packets to the switch The switch then changes the port state from accepted to rejected 2 EAP Terminating Mode In this mode packet transmission is terminated at authenticator systems and the EAP packets are mapped into RADIUS packets Authentication and accounting are accomplished through RADIUS protocol In this mode PAP or CHAP is employed between the switch and the RADIUS server This switch supports the PAP terminating mode The authentication procedure of PAP is illustrated in the following figure RADIUS Switch Authentication Server Supplicant System EAPOL Start EAP Request Identity EAP Response Identity EAP Request EAP Response RADIUS Access Request RADIUS Access Accept EAP Success Figure 12 19 PAP Authentication Procedure In PAP mode the switch encrypts the password and sends the
28. looping the sender and the receiver of the signal is used to test whether the port of the switch is available as well as to check and analyze the physical connection status of the port to help you locate and solve network malfunctions Choose the menu Maintenance Device Diagnose Loopback to load the following page Loopback Type Loopback Type Internal O External Loopback Port O1 O2 O3 Da Os Oe C7 Os Clg C10 Or1 O 12 C113 C14 O15 C116 O17 O18 Ora O 20 C21 22 23 C24 Loopback Result Port iA Type MWA Result WA Figure 16 8 Loopback The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Loopback Type Internal Select Internal to test whether the port is available External Select External to test whether the device connected to the port of the switch is available gt Loopback Port Loopback Port Select the desired port for loopback test Test Click the Test button to start the loopback test for the port 16 4 Network Diagnose This switch provides Ping test and Tracert test functions for network diagnose 16 4 1 Ping Ping test function testing the connectivity between the switch and one node of the network facilitates you to test the network connectivity and reachability of the host so as to locate the 228 network malfunctions Choose the menu Maintenance Network Diagnose gt Ping to load the following page Ping Config Destination IP 192 168 0 1 Ping Times 4 1 10 Data Size 64
29. timeout time the system will log out automatically If you want to reconfigure please login again gt Access User Number Number Control Select Enable Disable the Number Control function Admin Number Enter the maximum number of the users logging on to the Web management page as Admin Guest Number Enter the maximum number of the users logging on to the Web management page as Guest 4 4 2 SSL Config SSL Secure Sockets Layer a security protocol is to provide a secure connection for the application layer protocol e g HTTP communication based on TCP SSL is widely used to secure the data transmission between the Web browser and servers It is mainly applied through ecommerce and online banking SSL mainly provides the following services 1 Authenticate the users and the servers based on the certificates to ensure the data are transmitted to the correct users and servers 2 Encrypt the data transmission to prevent the data being intercepted 3 Maintain the integrality of the data to prevent the data being altered in the transmission Adopting asymmetrical encryption technology SSL uses key pair to encrypt decrypt information A key pair refers to a public key contained in the certificate and its corresponding private key By default the switch has a certificate self signed certificate and a corresponding private key The Certificate Key Download function enables the user to replace the default key pair After SSL
30. video on demand plays an important part in the information transmission field Suppose a point to multi point service is required unicast is suitable for networks with sparsely users whereas broadcast is suitable for networks with densely distributed users When the number of users requiring this information is not certain unicast and broadcast deliver a low efficiency Multicast solves this problem It can deliver a high efficiency to send data in the point to multi point service which can save large bandwidth and reduce the network load In multicast the packets are transmitted in the following way as shown in Figure 8 1 l 1 Multicast Source Multicast Streams amp Router Switch 1 iy Switch 2 FF S V PC PC Receiver 1 Receiver 2 Figure 8 1 Information transmission in the multicast mode Features of multicast 1 The number of receivers is not certain Usually point to multipoint transmission is needed 2 Multiple users receiving the same information form a multicast group The multicast information sender just need sends the information to the network device once 3 Each user can join and leave the multicast group at any time 4 Real time is highly demanded and certain packets drop is allowed gt Multicast Address 93 1 Multicast IP Address As specified by IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority Class D IP addresses are used as destination addresses of multicast pa
31. 122 9 3 3 o A teed sath eked a a aeaaee aaaeei A Asat 124 Chapter dO POE ita a id ida 126 10 1 POR Coi A A a ia 126 VO VAS POE COM nal A E t 127 10 12 Profile Config serieta e a 128 1072 POE Time Range ic AA A as 129 10 2 1 Time Range SUMMARY cccceceeeceeecee cece eeteeeeeeneeaeeeeeeeesesenceaeeeeeeeeeeteeneaees 129 10 2 2 PoE Time Range Create ooooococccccccccincononccconcnnonconnnncnnnnnnnnnonannnnnnncnncnnininnnnness 130 10 2 3 PoE Holiday Config cccc bec cccececekesectenceeecseetesbetgenescerevebeneesenasaeebeneeneadenes 131 Chapter IMAGE orere etan rena a r aa a aaar aa EA aaarnas 133 11 1 Time Range ssesssesssersrersserrrsnrrerrrennrennrannrenrrenrrenrrentrsttrentrentrantrennrennrentrentrennnena 133 11 1 1 Time Range SUMMalry cocccconoconcccncconnnncononnnnnnncnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnennaninnennces 133 14 12 Time Range Created eerren ec ad 134 111 3 Holiday CONG ts et io 135 112 ACE Conmmg an tits 135 TZT AGL SUMMAY iieiea eroen annae aae De aE aaa ak ined EEEE EAEAN A 136 N22 ACEGreate AA a ats a a es N 136 112 35 MACACE 1 A AE AS AA A A aat 137 11 24 Standard IP AG oir sebas 138 14 20 JEXxtend IP AC Li A NE ros 138 113 Poll CONG ienn rne arera a aa aa ra a ea aa aaaea cri 140 11 3 1 Policy SUMMATPY 0 0 0 eee cece ee eee e eee ee tee eee cece eeee eee aaaaaeeeeeeeesesenscieeeeeeeeeeteeneaees 140 11 3 2 Policy Create it iria 140 113 3 Action Create etario ta
32. 142 gt Policy Bind Table Select Index Policy Name Interface Direction 11 4 2 Port Binding Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding binding policy Displays the index of the binding policy Displays the name of the binding policy Displays the port number or VLAN ID bound to the policy Displays the binding direction On this page you can bind a policy to a port Choose the menu ACL gt Policy Binding Port Binding to load the following page Port Bind Config Policy Name Select Policy v Port Port Bind Table Format 1 3 6 8 Index Policy Name Port Direction Figure 11 13 Bind the policy to the port The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Bind Config Policy Name Port gt Port Bind Table Index Policy Name Port Direction 11 4 3 VLAN Binding Select the name of the policy you want to bind Enter the number of the port you want to bind Displays the index of the binding policy Displays the name of the binding policy Displays the number of the port bound to the corresponding policy Displays the binding direction On this page you can bind a policy to a VLAN Choose the menu ACL gt Policy Binding VLAN Binding to load the following page 143 VLAN Bind Config x Policy Name Select Policy VLAN ID WLAN Bind Table Index Policy Name Forrnat 2 10 100 WLAN IB Direction Figure11 14 Bind the po
33. ACL Create The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create ACL ACL ID Enter ACL ID of the ACL you want to create 136 Rule Order 11 2 3 MAC ACL User Config order is set to be match order in this ACL MAC ACLs analyze and process packets based on a series of match conditions which can be the source MAC addresses destination MAC addresses VLAN ID and EtherType carried in the packets Choose the menu ACL gt ACL Config MAC ACL to load the following page Create MAC Rule ACLID Rule ID Operation O s mac O p mac O VLAN ID O EtherType User Priority Time Range MAC ACL vw Permit v Mask Mask 4 hex number No Limit v No Limit Figure11 6 Create MAC Rule The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create MAC ACL ACL ID Rule ID Operation S MAC D MAC MASK VLAN ID EtherType User Priority Time Range Select the desired MAC ACL for configuration Enter the rule ID Select the operation for the switch to process packets which match the rules Permit Forward packets Deny Discard Packets Enter the source MAC address contained in the rule Enter the destination MAC address contained in the rule Enter MAC address mask If it is set to 1 it must strictly match the address Enter the VLAN ID contained in the rule Enter EtherType contained in the rule
34. Authentication for access e Port Based All the clients connected to the port can access the network on the condition that any one of the clients has passed the 802 1X Authentication Authorized Displays the authentication status of the port LAG Displays the LAG to which the port belongs to 12 4 3 Radius Server RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service server provides the authentication service for the switch via the stored client information such as the user name password etc with the purpose to control the authentication and accounting status of the clients On this page you can configure the parameters of the authentication server Choose the menu Network Security gt 802 1X Radius Server to load the following page Authentication Config Primary IP 0 0 0 0 Format 192 168 0 1 Secondary IP 0 0 0 0 Format 192 168 0 1 E _apply_ Auth Port 1812 1 65535 Auth Key Accounting Config Accounting Enable Disable Primary IP Format 192 168 0 1 Secondary IP Format 192 168 0 1 a Help Accounting Port 1 65535 Accounting Key Figure 12 22 Radius Server The following entries are displayed on this screen 173 gt Authentication Config Primary IP Secondary IP Authentication Port Authentication KEY gt Accounting Config Accounting Primary IP Secondary IP Accounting Port Accounting Key An ote Enter the IP address of the aut
35. Control feature When Flow Control is enabled the switch can synchronize the speed with its peer to avoid the packet loss caused by congestion Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to 1 The switch can not be managed through the disabled port Please enable the port which is used to manage the switch 2 The parameters of the port members in a LAG should be set as the same 5 1 2 Port Mirror Port Mirror the packets obtaining technology functions to forward copies of packets from one multiple ports mirrored port to a specific port mirroring port Usually the mirroring port is connected to a data diagnose device which is used to analyze the mirrored packets for monitoring and troubleshooting the network Choose the menu Switching gt Port gt Port Mirror to load the following page Mirror Group List Group Mirroring 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 Mode Mirrored Port Operation Ingress zee Edit Egress Ingress us Edit Egress sn Ingress ame Edit Egress Ingress eR Edit Egress Figure 5 2 Mirroring Port The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Mirror Group List 31 Group Displays the mirror group number Mirroring Displays the mirroring port number Mode Displays the mirror mode the value can be Ingress Egress Both or None Mirrored Port Displays the mirrored ports Operation Click Edit to configure the mirror group Click Edit to display the following figure
36. Description Usage in LLDPDU 192 0 End of LLDPDU Mark the end of the TLV sequence in Mandatory LLDPDUs Any information following an End Of LLDPDU TLV shall be ignored 1 Chassis ID Identifies the Chassis address of the connected Mandatory device 2 Port ID Identifies the specific port that transmitted the Mandatory LLDP frame When the device does not advertise MED TLY this field displays the port name of the port when the device advertises MED TLV this field displays the MAC address of the port 3 Time To Live Indicates the number of seconds that the Mandatory neighbor device is to regard the local information to be valid 4 Port Description Identifies the description string of the port Optional 5 System Name Identifies the system name Optional 6 System Identifies the system description Optional Description 7 System Identifies the main functions of the system and Optional Capabilities the functions enabled 8 Management Identifies the management IP address the Optional Address corresponding interface number and OID Object Identifier The management IP address is specified by the user 127 Organizationally Allows different organizations such as IEEE Optional Specific 802 1 IEEE 802 3 IETF as well as individual software and equipment vendors to define TLVs that advertise information to remote device Optional TLVs are grouped into two catego
37. Filter IP Range page 2 Configure multicast filter Optional Configure multicast filter rules for ports on rules for ports Multicast Multicast Filter Port Filter page 8 4 Packet Statistics On this page you can view the multicast data traffic on each port of the switch which facilitates you to monitor the IGMP messages in the network Choose the menu Multicast Packet Statistics to load the following page Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Enable Disable Refresh Period al sec 3 300 IGMP Statistics Port Pot Query Packet Shane ERIA da Leave Packet Error Packet 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 A 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 d 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 E Figure 8 12 Packet Statistics 108 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Refresh Period IGMP Statistics Port Select Port Query Packet Report Packet V1 Report Packet V2 Report Packet V3 Leave Packet Error Packet Select Enable Disable auto refresh feature Enter the time from 3 to 300 in seconds to specify the auto refresh period Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Displays the port number of the switch Displays the number of query packets the port received Displays the number of IGMPv1 re
38. Identfication TLV is included and Location Identification Parameters isn t set a default value is used in Location Identification TLV Extended Power Via MDI TLV The Extended Power Via MDI TLV is intended to enable advanced power management between LLDP MED Endpoint and Network Connectivity Devices and it allows advertisement of fine grained power requirement details Endpoint power priority as well as both Endpoint and Network Connectivity Device power status Inventory TLV The Inventory TLV set contains seven basic Inventory management TLVs that is Hardware Revision TLV Firmware Revision TLV Software Revision TLV Serial Number TLV Manufacturer Name TLV Model Name TLV and Asset ID TLV If support for any of the TLVs in the Inventory Management set is implemented then support for all Inventory Management TLVs shall be implemented LLDP MED is configured on the Global Config and Port Config pages 14 4 1 Global Config On this page you can configure the LLDP MED parameters of the device globally Choose the menu LLDP gt LLDP MED gt Global Config to load the following page LLDP MED Parameters Config Fast Start Count 4 1 10 Apply Device Class Network Connectivity Figure 14 6 LLDP MED Global Configuration The following entries are displayed on this screen gt LLDP MED Parameters Config Fast Start Count When LLDP MED fast start mechanism is activated multiple LLDP MED frames will be transmitted base
39. MIBs have been created to describe a network s physical topology and associated systems within that topology However there is no standard protocol for populating these MIBs or communicating this information among stations on the IEEE 802 LAN LLDP protocol specifies a set The device running LLDP can automatically discover and learn about the neighbors allowing for interoperability between the network devices of different vendors This protocol allows two systems running different network layer protocols to learn about each other LLDP MED Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches The LLDP MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy power via MDI inventory management and device location details The LLDP and LLDP MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting enhance network management and maintain an accurate network topology gt LLDPDU Format Each LLDPDU includes an ordered sequence of three mandatory TLVs followed by one or more optional TLVs plus an End of LLDPDU TLV as shown in the figure below Chassis ID TLV Port ID TLV TTL TLV and End TLV are the four mandatory TLVs for a LLDPDU Optional TLVs provide various details about the LLDP agent advertising them and they are selected by network management Chassis ID Port ID Time To Optional Optiona TLV TLV Live T
40. Port Time Displays the router port time of the VLAN Member Port Time Displays the member port time of the VLAN Leave Time Displays the leave time of the VLAN Router Port Displays the router port of the VLAN aan ote The settings here will be invalid when multicast VLAN is enabled Configuration procedure Step Operation Description 1 Enable IGMP Snooping Required Enable IGMP Snooping globally on the switch function and for the port on Multicast IGMP Snooping Snooping Config and Port Config page 2 Configure the multicast Optional Configure the multicast parameters for VLANs on parameters for VLANs Multicast IGMP Snooping VLAN Config page If a VLAN has no multicast parameters configuration it indicates the IGMP Snooping is not enabled in the VLAN thus the multicast data in the VLAN will be broadcasted 8 1 4 Multicast VLAN In old multicast transmission mode when users in different VLANs apply for join the same multicast group the multicast router will duplicate this multicast information and deliver each VLAN owning a receiver one copy This mode wastes a lot of bandwidth The problem above can be solved by configuring a multicast VLAN By adding switch ports to the multicast VLAN and enabling IGMP Snooping you can make users in different VLANs share the same multicast VLAN This saves the bandwidth since multicast streams are transmitted only within the multicast VLAN and also guaran
41. Protect is enabled for the port on Port Protect page the TC threshold and TC protect cycle need to be configured on this page Choose the menu Spanning Tree STP Security TC Protect to load the following page TC Protect TC Threshold 20 packet 1 100 Apply TC Protect Cycle 5 sec 1 10 f Help Figure 7 11 TC Protect The following entries are displayed on this screen gt TC Protect TC Threshold Enter a number from 1 to 100 It is the maximum number of the TC BPDUs received by the switch in a TC Protect Cycle The default value is 20 TC Protect Cycle Enter a value from 1 to 10 to specify the TC Protect Cycle The default value is 5 7 5 Application Example for STP Function gt Network Requirements e SwitchA B C D and E all support MSTP function e Ais the central switch e Band C are switches in the convergence layer D E and F are switches in the access layer e There are 6 VLANs labeled as VLAN101 VLAN106 in the network e All switches run MSTP and belong to the same MST region e The data in VLAN101 103 and 105 are transmitted in the STP with B as the root bridge The data in VLAN102 104 and 106 are transmitted in the STP with C as the root bridge Switch A Switch B Switch C gt Network Diagram td tal Switch D Switch E Switch F 89 gt Configuration Procedure e Configure Switch A Step Operation Description 1 Configure ports On VLAN gt
42. Router for joining leaving a multicast group by sending IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol messages When the up stream device forwards down the multicast data the switch is responsible for sending them to the hosts IGMP Snooping is a multicast control mechanism which can be used on the switch for dynamic registration of the multicast group The switch running IGMP Snooping manages and controls the multicast group via listening to and processing the IGMP messages transmitted between the hosts and the multicast router thereby effectively prevent multicast groups being broadcasted in the network The Multicast module is mainly for multicast management configuration of the switch including four submenus IGMP Snooping Multicast IP Multicast Filter and Packet Statistics 8 1 IGMP Snooping gt IGMP Snooping Process The switch running IGMP Snooping listens to the IGMP messages transmitted between the host and the router and tracks the IGMP messages and the registered port When receiving IGMP report message the switch adds the port to the multicast address table when the switch listens to IGMP leave message from the host the router sends the Group Specific Query message of the port to check if other hosts need this multicast if yes the router will receive IGMP report message if no the router will receive no response from the hosts and the switch will remove the port from the multicast address table The router regularly sends I
43. SSH client software SSH key can be downloaded into the switch If the key is successfully downloaded the certificate authentication will be preferred for SSH access to the switch Choose the menu System Access Seurity SSH Config to load the following page Global Config SSH O Enable Disable Protocol V1 O Enable Disable Protocol Y2 O Enable Disable Apply Idle Timeout 500 _ sec 1 999 Max Connect 5 1 5 Key Download Choose the SSH public key file to download into switch Key Type SSH 2 RSAIDSA vw keyri Bowe Note It will take a long time to download the key file Please wait without any operation Figure 4 16 SSH Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config SSH Select Enable Disable SSH function Protocol V1 Select Enable Disable SSH V1 to be the supported protocol Protocol V2 Select Enable Disable SSH V2 to be the supported protocol Idle Timeout Specify the idle timeout time The system will automatically release the connection when the time is up The default time is 500 seconds Max Connect Specify the maximum number of the connections to the SSH server No new connection will be established when the number of the connections reaches the maximum number you set The default value is 5 gt Key Download 25 Key Type Select the type of SSH Key to download The switch supports three types SSH 1 RSA SSH 2 RSA and SSH 2 DSA Key
44. Select this option to change the role of the switch to be individual switch e Fora member switch the following page is displayed Current Role Role Member Role Change Individual Figure 15 13 Cluster Configuration for Member Switch The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Current Role Role Displays the role the current switch plays in the cluster gt Role Change Individual Select this option to change the role of the switch to be individual switch e For an individual switch the following page is displayed 217 Current Role Role Individual Role Change Candidate Figure 15 14 Cluster Configuration for Individual Switch The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Current Role Role Displays the role the current switch plays in the cluster gt Role Change Candidate Select this option to change the role of the switch to be candidate switch 15 4 Application Example for Cluster Function gt Network Requirements Three switches form cluster one commander switch Here take TP LINK TL SL5428E as an example and two member switches Here take TP LINK TL SG32424P as an example The administrator manages all the switches in the cluster via the commander switch e Port 1 of the commander switch is connecting to the external network port 2 is connecting to member switch 1 and port 3 is connecting to member switch 2 e IP pool 175 128 0 1 Mask 255 255 255 0 gt Net
45. Switch Please read this guide carefully before operation 1 1 Intended Readers This Guide is intended for network managers familiar with IT concepts and network terminologies 1 2 Conventions In this Guide the following conventions are used gt The switch or TL SG3424P mentioned in this Guide stands for TL SG3424P JetStream L2 Managed PoE Switch without any explanation gt Menu Name gt Submenu Name gt Tab page indicates the menu structure System System Info gt System Summary means the System Summary page under the System Info menu option that is located under the System menu gt Bold font indicates a button a toolbar icon menu or menu item Symbols in this Guide Symbol Description A Ignoring this type of note might result in a malfunction or damage to the Note device This format indicates important information that helps you make better use Tips of your device 1 3 Overview of This Guide Chapter Introduction Chapter 1 About This Guide Introduces the guide structure and conventions Chapter 2 Introduction Introduces the features application and appearance of TL SG3424P switch Chapter 3 Login to the Switch Introduces how to log on to the Web management page Chapter Introduction Chapter 4 System This module is used to configure system properties of the switch Here mainly introduces e System Info Configure the description
46. System Power Remain Port Config Port Select Select Port Specify the max power the PoE switch can supply When the supply power exceeds the system power limit the PoE Switch guarantees the power supply with the following two methods Deny Next Port When the supply power exceeds the system power limit the newly connected PD will be disconnected Deny Lower Priority When the supply power exceeds the system power limit the PD linked to the port with lower priority will be disconnected Displays the PoE switch s real time system power consumption Displays the PoE switch s real time remaining system power Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding entry based on the port number you entered Select the desired port to configure its parameters Displays the port number 127 PoE Status Select to disable enable the PoE feature for the corresponding port If set enable the corresponding port can supply power to the linked PD Powered Device PoE Priority Cooperates with the Power Disconnected Method to decide the way to supply power to the new linked PD Powered Device when the surplus power is inadequate The priority levels include High Middle and Low in descending order Power Limit Defines the max power the corresponding port can supply Class1 0 1w 30w represents 4w Class2 represents 7w Class3 represents 15 4w and Class4 represents 30w Time Range Select the time range
47. Tracert The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Tracert Config Destination IP Enter the IP address of the destination device Max Hop Specify the maximum number of the route hops the test data can pass through Return to CONTENTS 230 Appendix A Specifications IEEE802 3 10Base T Ethernet IEEE802 3u 100Base TX 100Base FX Fast Ethernet IEEE802 3ab 1000Base T Gigabit Ethernet IEEE802 3z 1000Base X Gigabit Ethernet Standards IEEE802 3x Flow Control IEEE802 1p Priority IEEE802 1q VLAN Bridge IEEE802 1X Port based Access Authentication Ethernet 10Mbps HD 20Mbps FD Transmission Rate Fast Ethernet 100Mbps HD 200Mbps FD Gigabit Ethernet 2000Mbps FD 10Base T UTP STP of Cat 3 or above 100Base TX UTP STP of Cat 5 or above Sa da 100Base FX MMF or SMF SFP Module Optional 1000Base T 4 pair UTP lt 100m of Cat 5 Cat 5e Cat 6 or above 1000Base X MMF or SMF SFP Module Optional Power System Port Status LED Speed PoE PoE Max Transmission Method Store and Forward 10BASE T 14881pps port Packets Forwarding Rate 100BASE TX 148810pps port 1000Base T 1488095pps port Operating Temperature 0 C 40 C Operating Storage Temperature 40 C 70 C Environment Operating Humidity 10 90 RH Non condensing Storage Humidity 5 90 RH Non condensing Return to CONTENTS 231 Appendix B Configuring the PCs In this section we ll introduce how to install and config
48. VLAN gt MAC VLAN page create MAC VLAN10 with the MAC VLAN 10 address as 00 19 56 8A 4C 71 Configure MAC On VLAN gt MAC VLAN page create MAC VLAN10 with the MAC VLAN 20 address as 00 19 56 82 3B 70 e Configure Switch C Step Operation Description Configure the Link Type of the ports Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page configure the link type of Port 2 and Port 3 as GENERAL and configure the link type of Port 4 and Port 5 as ACCESS Create VLAN10 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLANID as 10 owning Port 2 Port 3 and Port 5 Create VLAN20 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLANID as 20 owning Port 2 Port 3 and Port 4 6 6 Application Example for Protocol VLAN v gt Network Requirements Department A is connected to the company LAN via Port12 of Switch A Department A has IP host and AppleTalk host IP host in VLAN10 is served by IP server while AppleTalk host is served by AppleTalk server Switch B is connected to IP server and AppleTalk server Network Diagram IP Server AppleTalk Server Switch B 4 Port Switch A Port 13 i 11 AppleTalk host ge ge IP host Configuration Procedure e Configure Switch A Step Operation Description Configure the Link Type of the ports Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN g
49. access the specific network resource By default all the ports connected to the supplicants belong to a VLAN i e Guest VLAN Users belonging to the Guest VLAN can access the resources of the Guest VLAN without being authenticated But they need to be authenticated before accessing external resources After passing the authentication the ports will be removed from the Guest VLAN and be allowed to access the other resources With the Guest VLAN function enabled users can access the Guest VLAN to install 802 1X client program or upgrade their 802 1x clients without being authenticated If there is no supplicant past the authentication on the port in a certain time the switch will add the port to the Guest VLAN With 802 1X function enabled and Guest VLAN configured after the maximum number retries have been made to send the EAP Request Identity packets and there are still ports that have not sent any response back the switch will then add these ports into the Guest VLAN according to their link types Only when the corresponding user passes the 802 1X authentication the port will be removed from the Guest VLAN and added to the specified VLAN In addition the port will back to the Guest VLAN when its connected user logs off The 802 1X function is implemented on the Global Config Port Config and Radius Server pages 12 4 1 Global Config On this page you can enable the 802 1X authentication function globally and control the authenticatio
50. any operation 16 3 Device Diagnose This switch provides Cable Test and Loopback functions for device diagnose 16 3 1 Cable Test Cable Test functions to test the connection status of the cable connected to the switch which facilitates you to locate and diagnose the trouble spot of the network Choose the menu Maintenance Device Diagnose Cable Test to load the following page Cable Test Port v Unit meter Pair Status Length Error Pair A Pair B Pair C Pair D Note 1 The interval between two cable test for one port must be more than 3 seconds 2 The result is more reasonable when the cable pair is in the open status 3 The result is just for your information Figure 16 7 Cable Test The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Cable Test Port Select the port for cable testing Pair Displays the Pair number Status Displays the connection status of the cable connected to the port The test results of the cable include normal close open short impedance or unknown Length If the connection status is normal here displays the length range of the cable Error If the connection status is close open or impedance here displays the error length of the cable 227 aan ote 1 The Length displayed here is the length of pair cable not that of the physical cable 2 The test result is just for your reference 16 3 2 Loopback Loopback test function
51. certificate and key downloaded will not take effect until the switch is rebooted To establish a secured connection using https please enter https into the URL field of the browser 4 It may take more time for https connection than that for http connection because https connection involves authentication encryption and decryption etc 4 4 3 SSH Config As stipulated by IETF Internet Engineering Task Force SSH Secure Shell is a security protocol established on application and transport layers SSH encrypted connection is similar to a telnet connection but essentially the old telnet remote management method is not safe because the password and data transmitted with plain text can be easily intercepted SSH can provide information security and powerful authentication when you log on to the switch remotely through an insecure network environment It can encrypt all the transmission data and prevent the 24 information in a remote management being leaked Comprising server and client SSH has two versions V1 and V2 which are not compatible with each other In the communication SSH server and client can auto negotiate the SSH version and the encryption algorithm After getting a successful negotiation the client sends authentication request to the server for login and then the two can communicate with each other after successful authentication This switch supports SSH server and you can log on to the switch via SSH connection using
52. condition for the root port to transit its port state rapidly The old root port of the switch stops forwarding data and the designated port of the upstream switch begins to forward data e The condition for the designated port to transit its port state rapidly The designated port is an edge port or connecting to a point to point link If the designated port is an edge port it can directly transit to forwarding state if the designated port is connecting to a point to point link it can transit to forwarding state after getting response from the downstream switch through handshake gt RSTP Elements Edge Port Indicates the port connected directly to terminals P2P Link Indicates the link between two switches directly connected MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol compatible with both STP and RSTP and subject to IEEE 802 1s standard not only enables spanning trees to converge rapidly but also enables packets of different VLANs to be forwarded along their respective paths so as to provide redundant links with a better load balancing mechanism Features of MSTP e MSTP combines VLANs and spanning tree together via VLAN to instance mapping table It binds several VLANs to an instance to save communication cost and network resources e MSTP divides a spanning tree network into several regions Each region has several internal spanning trees which are independent of each other e MSTP provides a load balancing mechanism for the packets
53. determines the actual TTL Time To Live value used in an LLDPDU TTL Hold Multiplier Transmit Interval The default value is 4 Enter a value from 1 to 8192 in seconds to specify the time for the local device to transmit LLDPDU to its neighbors after changes occur so as to prevent LLDPDU being sent frequently The default value is 2 This parameter indicates the amount of delay from when LLDP status becomes disable until re initialization will be attempted The default value is 3 Specify the interval of Trap message which will be sent from local device to network management system The default value is 5 195 Fast Start Count When the port s LLDP state transforms from Disable or Rx_Only to Tx amp Rx or Tx_Only the fast start mechanism will be enabled that is the transmit interval will be shorten to a second and several LLDPDUs will be sent out the number of LLDPDUs equals this parameter The default value is 3 14 1 2 Port Config On this page you can configure all ports LLDP parameters Choose the menu LLDP gt Basic Config Port Config to load the following page LLDP Port Config Port Select Port Admin Status Notification Mode Included TL s O Disable v Disable v O 1 Tx amp Rx Disable Detail A O 2 T amp R Disable Detail O 3 TARY Disable Detail O 4 Tx amp Rx Disable Detail E O 5 Tx amp Rx Disable Detail O 6 Tx amp RX Disable Detail O 7 Tx amp Rx Disable Detail E O 8 TxGRx Disable Detail O g Tx amp
54. each time range four time slices can be configured The Time Range configuration can be implemented on PoE Time Range Summary PoE Time Range Create and PoE Holiday Config pages 10 2 1 Time Range Summary On this page you can view or delete the current time ranges Choose the menu PoE gt PoE Time Range PoE Time Range Summary to load the following page Time Range Table Select Index Time Range Name Slice 1 Slice 2 Slice 3 Slice 4 Mode Operation O 1 11 08 30 18 00 Week Edit Detail All Delete Help Figure 10 3 Time Range Table The following items are displayed on this screen 129 gt Time Range Table Select Index Time Range Name Slice Mode Operation Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding time range Displays the index of the time range Displays the name of the time range Displays the time slice of the time range Displays the mode the time range adopts Click Edit to modify this time range and click Detail to display the complete information of this time range 10 2 2 PoE Time Range Create On this page you can create time ranges Choose the menu PoE gt PoE Time Range PoE Time Range Create to load the following page Create Time Range Name O Exclude Holiday O Absolute Start Date i i End Date 01 iv O Week Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Create Time Slice Start Time oo Mj 00 wi End Time 24 g Time Slice Table
55. enabled the switch can terminate receiving the ARP packets for 300 seconds when the transmission speed of the legal ARP packet on the port exceeds the defined value so as to avoid ARP Attack flood Choose the menu Network Security ARP Inspection ARP Defend to load the following page 162 ARP Defend Select Port Defend Port Status LAG Operation Speed Current Speed 10 100 pps pps Disable v Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable 0 400 M A whe j S a a e o Note 15 El 15 15 15 15 15 E 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 ES itis not recommended to enable ARP Defend for LAG member Figure 12 14 ARP Defend The following entries are displayed on this screen gt ARP Defend Port Select Select Port Defend Speed Current Speed Status LAG Operation An ote Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select your desired port for configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number Select Enable Disable the ARP Defend feature for the port Enter a value to specify the maximum amount of the received ARP packets per second Displays the current speed of the received ARP packets Displays the status of the ARP attack Displays the LAG to which the port bel
56. for the switch The system priority and MAC address constitute the system identification ID A lower system priority value indicates a higher system priority When exchanging information between systems the system with higher priority determines which link aggregation a link belongs to and the system with lower priority adds the proper links to the link aggregation according to the selection of its partner Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select the desired port for LACP configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number Specify an Admin Key for the port The member ports in a dynamic aggregation group must have the same Admin Key Specify a Port Priority for the port This value determines the priority 40 of the port to be selected as the dynamic aggregation group member The port with smaller Port Priority will be considered as the preferred one If the two port priorities are equal the port with smaller port number is preferred Status Enable Disable the LACP feature for your selected port LAG Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to 5 3 Traffic Monitor The Traffic Monitor function monitoring the traffic of each port is implemented on the Traffic Summary and Traffic Statistics pages 5 3 1 Traffic Summary Traffic Summary screen displays the traffic information of each port which facilitates you to monitor the traffic and a
57. good broadcast packets received or transmitted on the port The error frames are not counted in Displays the number of good multicast packets received or transmitted on the port The error frames are not counted in Displays the number of good unicast packets received or transmitted on the port The error frames are not counted in Displays the number of the received packets that have a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with a non integral octet Alignment Error The length of the packet is between 64 bytes and 1518 bytes Displays the number of the received packets excluding error packets that are less than 64 bytes long Displays the number of the received packets including error packets that are 64 bytes long Displays the number of the received packets including error packets that are between 65 and 127 bytes long Displays the number of the received packets including error packets that are between 128 and 255 bytes long Displays the number of the received packets including error packets that are between 256 and 511 bytes long Displays the number of the received packets including error packets that are between 512 and 1023 bytes long Displays the number of the received packets including error packets that are over 1023 bytes Displays the number of collisions experienced by a port during packet transmissions 5 4 MAC Address The main function of the switch is forwarding the packets to the correct ports
58. gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLANID as 20 owning Port 3 and Port 4 e Configure Switch B Step Operation Description 1 Configure the Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page configure Link Type of the the link type of Port 7 Port 6 and Port 8 as ACCESS TRUNK and ports ACCESS respectively 2 Create VLAN10 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLANID as 10 owning Port 6 and Port 8 3 Create VLAN20 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLANID as 20 owning Port 6 and Port 7 6 5 Application Example for MAC VLAN gt Network Requirements e Switch A and Switch B are connected to meeting room A and meeting room B respectively and the two rooms are for all departments e Notebook A and Notebook B special for meeting room are of two different departments e The two departments are in VLAN10 and VLAN20 respectively The two notebooks can just access the server of their own departments that is Server A and Server B in the two meeting rooms e The MAC address of Notebook A is 00 19 56 8A 4C 71 Notebook B s MAC address is 00 19 56 82 3B 70 gt Network Diagram 66 Server B Server A Switch C Switch B Port 21 Meeting Room A Y E Meeting Room B Notebook A Notebook B Port 1 Switch A gt Configuration Procedure e Configure Switch A Step Operation
59. its default network 4 1 4 System IP Each device in the network possesses a unique IP Address You can log on to the Web management page to operate the switch using this IP Address The switch supports three modes to obtain an IP address Static IP DHCP and BOOTP The IP address obtained using a new mode will replace the original IP address On this page you can configure the system IP of the switch Choose the menu System System Info System IP to load the following page IP Config MAC Address IP Address Mode Management WYLAN IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Note 00 04 EB 00 13 01 Static IP O DHCP BOOTP VLAN ID 1 4094 192 168 0 1 1255 255 255 0 j Changing IP address to a different IP segment will interrupt the network communication so please keep the new IP address in the same IP segment with the local network Figure 4 6 System IP The following entries are displayed on this screen gt IP Config MAC Address IP Address Mode Management VLAN IP Address Displays MAC Address of the switch Select the mode to obtain IP Address for the switch e Static IP When this option is selected you should enter IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway manually e DHCP When this option is selected the switch will obtain network parameters from the DHCP Server e BOOTP When this option is selected the switch will obtain network parameters from
60. multicast MAC address The high order 4 bits of the IP multicast address are 1110 identifying the multicast group Only 23 bits of the remaining low order 28 bits are mapped to a multicast MAC address In that way 5 bits of the IP multicast address is not utilized As a result 32 IP multicast addresses are mapped to the same MAC addresses gt Multicast Address Table The switch is forwarding multicast packets based on the multicast address table As the transmission of multicast packets can not span the VLAN the first part of the multicast address table is VLAN ID based on which the received multicast packets are forwarded in the VLAN owning the receiving port The multicast address table is not mapped to an egress port but a group port list When forwarding a multicast packet the switch looks up the multicast address table based on the destination multicast address of the multicast packet If the corresponding entry can not be found in the table the switch will broadcast the packet in the VLAN owning the receiving port If the corresponding entry can be found in the table it indicates that the destination address should be a group port list so the switch will duplicate this multicast data and deliver each port one copy The general format of the multicast address table is described as Figure 8 3 below VLANID MulticastIP_ Port Figure 8 3 Multicast Address Table 94 gt IGMP Snooping In the network the hosts apply to the near
61. other information of this sort carried in the packets Choose the menu ACL ACL Config Extend IP ACL to load the following page 138 Create Extend IP Rule ACLID Extend IP ACL Rule ID Operation Permit 3 O sp E Mask O D P Mask IP Protocol All v TCP Flag URG ack PSH RST SYN gt FIN S Port D Port DSCP All v IP ToS All v IP Pre All v Time Range No Limit Y Figure11 8 Create Extend IP Rule The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Extend IP ACL ACL ID Select the desired Extend IP ACL for configuration Rule ID Enter the rule ID Operation Select the operation for the switch to process packets which match the rules Permit Forward packets Deny Discard Packets S IP Enter the source IP address contained in the rule D IP Enter the destination IP address contained in the rule Mask Enter IP address mask If it is set to 1 it must strictly match the address IP Protocol Select IP protocol contained in the rule TCP Flag Configure TCP flag when TCP is selected from the pull down list of IP Protocol S Port Configure TCP IP source port contained in the rule when TCP UDP is selected from the pull down list of IP Protocol D Port Configure TCP IP destination port contained in the rule when TCP UDP is selected from the pull down list
62. range to determine the candidate switches in the cluster Cluster maintenance The commander switch adds the candidate switch to the cluster and removes the member switch from the cluster according to the collected NTDP information The Cluster module mainly used for cluster management configuration including three submenus NDP NTDP and Cluster 15 1 NDP NDP Neighbor Discovery Protocol is used to get the information of the directly connected neighbor devices to support cluster establishing An NDP enabled device sends NDP packets regularly to neighbor devices as well as receives NDP packets from neighbor devices An NDP packet carries the NDP information including the device name MAC address firmware version and so on A switch keeps and maintains a neighbor information table which contains the NDP information of each neighbor switch If a switch receives the NDP information of a new neighbor it will add the information to the neighbor information table If the received NDP information is different from the old information the switch will update it in the neighbor information table if the received NDP information is the same with the old information the switch will just update the aging time if the switch does not receive NDP information within the aging time the switch will remove the corresponding information from the table automatically The NDP function can be implemented on Neighbor Info NDP Summary and NDP Config pages
63. sends out a Join message in order to be registered by the other GARP entities e Leave Message When a GARP entity expects other switches to deregister certain attribute information of its own it sends out a Leave message And when receiving the Leave message from the other entity or deregistering some attributes statically the device also sends out a Leave message e LeaveAll Message Once a GARP entity starts up it starts the LeaveAll timer After the timer times out the GARP entity sends out a LeaveAll message LeaveAll message is to deregister all the attribute information so as to enable the other GARP entities to re register attribute information of their own Through message exchange all the attribute information to be registered can be propagated to all the switches in the same switched network The interval of GARP messages is controlled by timers GARP defines the following timers e Hold Timer When a GARP entity receives a piece of registration information it does not send out a Join message immediately Instead to save the bandwidth resources it starts the Hold timer puts all registration information it receives before the timer times out into one Join message and sends out the message after the timer times out e Join Timer To transmit the Join messages reliably to other entities a GARP entity sends each Join message two times The Join timer is used to define the interval between the two sending operations of each Join me
64. stops forwarding packets as if it is disconnected from the link The port resumes the normal state if it does not receive any configuration BPDU packets with higher priorities for a period of two times of forward delay gt TC Protect A switch removes MAC address entries upon receiving TC BPDU packets If a user maliciously sends a large amount of TC BPDU packets to a switch in a short period the switch will be busy with removing MAC address entries which may decrease the performance and stability of the network To prevent the switch from frequently removing MAC address entries you can enable the TC protect function on the switch With TC protect function enabled if the account number of the received TC BPDUs exceeds the maximum number you set in the TC threshold field the switch will not performs the removing operation in the TC protect cycle Such a mechanism prevents the switch from frequently removing MAC address entries gt BPDU Protect Ports of the switch directly connected to PCs or servers are configured as edge ports to rapidly transit their states When these ports receive BPDUs the system automatically configures these ports as non edge ports and regenerates spanning trees which may cause network topology jitter Normally these ports do not receive BPDUs but if a user maliciously attact the switch by sending BPDUs network topology jitter occurs To prevent this attack MSTP provides BPDU protect function With this fu
65. system time and network parameters of the switch e User Manage Configure the user name and password for users to log on to the Web management page with a certain access level e System Tools Manage the configuration file of the switch e Access Security Provide different security measures for the login to enhance the configuration management security Chapter 5 Switching This module is used to configure basic functions of the switch Here mainly introduces e Port Configure the basic features for the port e LAG Configure Link Aggregation Group LAG is to combine a number of ports together to make a single high bandwidth data path e Traffic Monitor Monitor the traffic of each port e MAC Address Configure the address table of the switch Chapter 6 VLAN This module is used to configure VLANs to control broadcast in LANs Here mainly introduces e 802 1Q VLAN Configure port based VLAN e MAC VLAN Configure MAC based VLAN without changing the 802 1Q VLAN configuration e Protocol VLAN Create VLANs in application layer to make some special data transmitted in the specified VLAN e GVRP GVRP allows the switch to automatically add or remove the VLANs via the dynamic VLAN registration information and propagate the local VLAN registration information to other switches without having to individually configure each VLAN Chapter 7 Spanning Tree This module is used to configure spanning tree function of t
66. the complete address entries Figure 5 13 Static Address The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Static Address MAC Address Enter the static MAC Address to be bound VLAN ID Enter the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address Port Select a port from the pull down list to be bound gt Search Option Search Option Select a Search Option from the pull down list and click the Search 46 gt Static Address Table Select MAC Address VLAN ID Port Type Aging Status n ote button to find your desired entry in the Static Address Table e MAC Enter the MAC address of your desired entry e VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID number of your desired entry e Port Enter the Port number of your desired entry Select the entry to delete or modify the corresponding port number It is multi optional Displays the static MAC Address Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address Displays the corresponding Port number of the MAC address Here you can modify the port number to which the MAC address is bound The new port should be in the same VLAN Displays the Type of the MAC address Displays the Aging Status of the MAC address 1 If the corresponding port number of the MAC address is not correct or the connected port or the device has been changed the switch can not be forward the packets correctly Please reset the static address entry appropriately 2 Ifthe MAC address of
67. the following steps 1 On the Windows taskbar click the Start button point to All Programs gt TP LINK gt TpSupplicant V2 0 and then click Uninstall TP LINK 802 1X shown as the following figure de N A Administr he Y Internet Internet Explorer E mail Outlook Express ca Command Prompt gt Windows Media Plays Ej Smart Window 33 Windows Messenger Tour Windows XP 0151100 exe o nuvve Lavevycae esigue U U A ULtralso gt E SnagIt 7 gt 7 CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 12 gt 7 Soli dConver tPDF R Adobe Help Center Foxmail gt Microsoft Word we msn Microsoft Project 7 CorelDRAW 9 gt m Symantec Client Security 7 DAEMON Tools Lite m Network Print Server gt m Macrobject gt si Adobe ImageReady CS2 Q Adobe Photoshop CS2 8 Windows Movie Maker m Mozilla Firefox All Programs fm TP LINK fm TpSupplicant V2 0 gt Preso Ojznw E re Link 802 1x A Uninstall TP LINK 802 1X 4Y y dwa NETO Figure D 8 2 Then the following screen will appear If you want to stop the remove process click Cancel 243 TpSupplicant 2 0 InstallShield Wizard Preparing Setup Please wait while the InstallShield Wizard prepares the setup TpSupplicant V2 0 Setup is preparing the InstallShield Wizard which will guide you through the test of the setup process Please wait InstallShield Cancel
68. to VLANs This decreases bandwidth utilization and improves network performance 2 Network security is improved VLANs cannot communicate with one another directly That is a host in a VLAN cannot access resources in another VLAN directly unless routers or Layer 3 switches are used 3 Network configuration workload for the host is reduced VLAN can be used to group specific hosts When the physical position of a host changes within the range of the VLAN you need not change its network configuration A VLAN can span across multiple switches or even routers This enables hosts in a VLAN to be dispersed in a looser way That is hosts in a VLAN can belong to different physical network segments This switch supports three ways namely 802 1Q VLAN MAC VLAN and Protocol VLAN to classify VLANs VLAN tags in the packets are necessary for the switch to identify 51 packets of different VLANs The switch can analyze the received untagged packets on the port and match the packets with the MAC VLAN Protocol VLAN and 802 1Q VLAN in turn If a packet is matched the switch will add a corresponding VLAN tag to it and forward it in the corresponding VLAN 6 1 802 1Q VLAN VLAN tags in the packets are necessary for the switch to identify packets of different VLANs The switch works at the data link layer in OSI model and it can identify the data link layer encapsulation of the packet only so you can add the VLAN tag field into the data link layer
69. transmission in the VLAN e MSTP is compatible with both STP and RSTP gt MSTP Elements MST Region Multiple Spanning Tree Region An MST Region comprises switches with the same region configuration and VLAN to Instances mapping relationship IST Internal Spanning Tree An IST is a spanning tree in an MST CST Common Spanning Tree ACST is the spanning tree in a switched network that connects all MST regions in the network CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree A CIST comprising IST and CST is the spanning tree in a switched network that connects all switches in the network The following figure shows the network diagram in MSTP 76 gt Figure 7 2 Basic MSTP diagram MSTP MSTP divides a network into several MST regions The CST is generated between these MST regions and multiple spanning trees can be generated in each MST region Each spanning tress is called an instance As well as STP MSTP uses BPDUs to generate spanning tree The only difference is that the BPDU for MSTP carry the MSTP configuration information on the switches gt Port States In an MSTP ports can be in the following four states O O O gt Forwarding In this status the port can receive forward data receive send BPDU packets as well as learn MAC address Learning In this status the port can receive send BPDU packets and learn MAC address Blocking In this status the port can only receive BPDU packets Disconnected In th
70. transmission priority of voice data stream and voice quality Chapter 10 PoE This module is used to configure the PoE function for the switch to supply power for PD devices Here mainly introduces e PoE Config Configure PoE function globally e PoE Time Range Configure the effective time for PoE port to supply power Chapter 11 ACL This module is used to configure match rules and process policies of packets to filter packets in order to control the access of the illegal users to the network Here mainly introduces e Time Range Configure the effective time for ACL rules e ACL Config ACL rules e Policy Config Configure operation policies e Policy Binding Bind the policy to a port VLAN to take its effect on a specific port VLAN Chapter 12 Network Security This module is used to configure the multiple protection measures for the network security Here mainly introduces e P MAC Binding Bind the IP address MAC address VLAN ID and the connected Port number of the Host together e ARP Inspection Configure ARP inspection feature to prevent the network from ARP attacks e DoS Defend Configure DoS defend feature to prevent DoS attack e 802 1X Configure common access control mechanism for LAN ports to solve mainly authentication and security problems Chapter 13 SNMP This module is used to configure SNMP function to provide a management frame to monitor and maintain the network devices
71. way VLAN packets are processed in the following way 1 When receiving an untagged packet the switch matches the packet with the current Protocol VLAN If the packet is matched the switch will add a corresponding Protocol VLAN tag to it If no Protocol VLAN is matched the switch will add a tag to the packet according to the PVID of the received port Thus the packet is assigned automatically to the corresponding VLAN for transmission 2 When receiving tagged packet the switch will process it based on the 802 1Q VLAN If the received port is the member of the VLAN to which the tagged packet belongs the packet will be forwarded normally Otherwise the packet will be discarded 3 If the Protocol VLAN is created please set its enabled port to be the member of corresponding 802 1Q VLAN so as to ensure the packets forwarded normally 6 3 1 Protocol Group Table On this page you can create Protocol VLAN and view the information of the current defined Protocol VLANs Choose the menu VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Protocol Group Table to load the following page Protocol Group Table Select Protocol VLAN IB Member Operation F IP 1 2 Edit 2 Figure 6 8 Protocol Group Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Protocol Group Table Select Select the desired entry It is multi optional Protocol Displays the protocol of the protocol group VLAN ID Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the protocol group
72. works improperly On The remaining PoE powers7W PoE Max Flashing To remaining PoE power keeps lt 7W after this LED is on for 2 minutes Off The remaining PoE power gt 7W On The port is supplying power normally Green 10 100 Flashing The supply power exceeds the correspond port s maximum power 1000 tre Mbps Yellow On Overload or short circuit is detected Port LED Flashing Power on self test has failed Off No PoE power supply is provided on the port 2 3 2 Rear Panel The rear panel of TL SG3424P features a power socket and a Grounding Terminal marked withS 100 240V 50 60Hz 0 6A Figure 2 2 Rear Panel gt Grounding Terminal TL SG3424P already comes with Lightning Protection Mechanism You can also ground the Switch through the PE Protecting Earth cable of AC cord or with Ground Cable For detail information please refer to Installation Guide gt AC Power Socket Connect the female connector of the power cord here and the male connector to the AC power outlet Please make sure the voltage of the power supply meets the requirement of the input voltage 100 240V 50 60Hz 0 64 Return to CONTENTS Chapter 3 Login to the Switch 3 1 Login 1 To access the configuration utility open a web browser and type in the default address http 192 168 0 1 in the address field of the browser then press the Enter key Ate 182 188 01 Figure 3 1 Web browser Tips To log in to the Swi
73. 0 Scanning Option Start IP Address End IP Address VLAN ID 1 4094 Scanning Result Select Host Name Entry Count 0 Note 1 The VLAN ID option is intended for scaning the network topology with the VLAN spanning across multiple switches 2 VLAN ID affects the VLAN Tag in the ARP request packets used in the ARP Scanning and is independent of the VLAN configuration 3 If VLAN ID is blank the switch will broadcast untaged ARP request packets in the ARP Scanning IP Address MAC Address YLANID Port Protect Type Collision Bind Delete Help Figure 12 4 ARP Scanning The following entries are displayed on this screen gt 12 1 4 DHCP Snooping Scanning Option Start IP Address End IP Address VLAN ID Scan Scanning Result Select Host Name IP Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port Protect Type Collision Specify the Start IP Address Specify the End IP Address Enter the VLAN ID If blank the switch will send the untagged packets for scanning Click the Scan button to scan the Hosts in the LAN Select the desired entry to be bound or deleted Displays the Host Name here Displays the IP Address of the Host Displays the MAC Address of the Host Displays the VLAN ID here Displays the number of port connected to the Host Displays the Protect Type of the entry Displays the Collision status of the entry Warning Indicates that the collision may be caused by the MSTP fu
74. 0 recommemed 300 sec 60 600 recommemed 260 sec 1 30 recommemed 1 Disable v VLANID Router Port Time Member Port Time Leave Time Router Port 300 260 1 1 static 90 60 2 180 90 6 G static The settings here will be invalid when multicast LAN is enabled Figure 8 6 VLAN Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt VLAN Config VLAN ID Router Port Time Member Port Time Leave Time Static Router Port VLAN Table VLAN ID Select Select Enter the VLAN ID to enable IGMP Snooping for the desired VLAN Specify the aging time of the router port Within this time if the switch doesn t receive IGMP query message from the router port it will consider this port is not a router port any more Specify the aging time of the member port Within this time if the switch doesn t receive IGMP report message from the member port it will consider this port is not a member port any more Specify the interval between the switch receiving a leave message from a host and the switch removing the host from the multicast groups Select the static router port which is mainly used in the network with stable topology Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding VLAN ID based on the ID number you entered Select the desired VLAN ID for configuration It is multi optional 99 VLAN ID Displays the VLAN ID Router
75. 0 00 32 Candidate 0 Detail Figure 15 5 Device Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Device Table Device Type Displays the device description collected through NTDP Device MAC Displays the MAC address of this device 211 Cluster Name Role Hops Neighbor Info Collect Topology Displays the cluster name of this device Displays the role this device plays in the cluster e Commander Indicates the device that can configure and manage all the devices in a cluster Member Indicates the device that is managed in a cluster e Candidate Indicates the device that does not belong to any cluster though it can be added to a cluster e Individual Indicates the device with cluster feature disabled Displays the hop count from this device to the switch Click the Detail button to view the complete information of this device and its neighbors Click the Collect Topology button to collect NTDP information of the switch so as to collect the latest network topology Click the Detail button to view the complete information of this device and its neighbors Current Device Info Device Name MAC Hops Device Type IP Address Firmware Version Cluster Info Neighbor Info Native Port Port 01 TL 563424P 00 14 78 00 00 32 0 TL 563424P 1 0 192 168 0 1 0 3 3 Build 20111215 Rel 39908 Candidate Remote Port Device MAC Speed Mbit s Duplex Port 24 00 00 54 28 00 04 100 Full
76. 0 19 66 35 E5 7F 1 6 Dynamic Aging O 00 19 66 80 53 5E 1 6 Dynamic Aging O 00 19 66 80 54 2B 1 8 Dynamic Aging O 00 19 66 80 54 36 1 6 Dynamic Aging O 00 19 66 80 54 44 1 6 Dynamic Aging O 00 19 66 82 94 37 1 6 Dynamic Aging O 00 1 9 66 82 94 4C 1 6 Dynamic Aging O 00 1 9 66 83 AB 79 1 6 Dynamic Aging O 00 19 66 C9 02 24 1 6 Dynamic Aging x All Total MAC Address 55 Note The maximum ofthe displayed entries is 100 by default please click the Search button to get the complete address entries Figure 5 14 Dynamic Address The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Aging Config Auto Aging Aging Time gt Search Option Search Option Allows you to Enable Disable the Auto Aging feature Enter the Aging Time for the dynamic address Select a Search Option from the pull down list and click the Search button to find your desired entry in the Dynamic Address Table e MAC Enter the MAC address of your desired entry e VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID number of your desired entry e Port Enter the Port number of your desired entry gt Dynamic Address Table 48 Select Select the entry to delete the dynamic address or to bind the MAC address to the corresponding port statically It is multi optional MAC Address Displays the dynamic MAC Address VLAN ID Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address Port Displays the corresponding port number of the MAC address Type Displays the Type
77. 02 03 c0 9a d3 2006 01 01 10 44 41 1 Figure 7 5 STP Summary On this page you can configure the parameters of the ports for CIST Choose the menu Spanning Tree Port Config to load the following page 80 Port Config Select Part Status O Disable v O 1 Disable O 2 Disable O 3 Disable O 4 Disable o 5 Disable o 6 Disable O 7 Disable O 8 Disable O 9 Disable O 10 Disable O 11 Disable O 12 Disable O 13 Disable O 14 Disable O 15 Disable Note Priority 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 Pot ExtPath Cost IntPath Cost Edge Port P2P Link MCheck STP Version Port Role Port Status LAG Disable v Auto vw Unchange Auto Auto Disable Auto S Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Auto Auto Disable Auto Y app Reresn Help Ifthe Path Cost of a port is setto 0 it will alter automatically according to the port s link speed Figure 7 6 Port Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Config Port Select Select Port Status Priority ExtPath IntPath Edge Port P2P Link MCheck STP Version Port Role
78. 10 PoE PoE Power over Ethernet technology describes a system to transmit electrical power along with data to remote devices over standard twisted pair cable in an Ethernet network It is especially useful for supplying power to IP telephones wireless LAN access points cameras and so on gt Composition A PoE system usually consists of PSE and PD PSE Power sourcing equipment PSE is a device such as a switch that provides power on the Ethernet cable to the linked device PD A powered device PD is a device accepting power from the PSE and thus consumes energy PDs falls into two types standard PDs and nonstandard PDs Standard PDs refer to the powered devices that comply with IEEE 802 3af and IEEE 802 3at Examples include wireless LAN access points IP Phones IP cameras network hubs embedded computers etc gt Advantage o Cheap cabling The remote device such as cameras can be powered by PSE in no need of prolonging its power cord additionally and Ethernet cable is much cheaper than AC wire or power cord o Easy to connect PoE uses only one Ethernet cable with no need of external power supply o Reliable A powered device can be either powered by PSE using Ethernet cable or powered through the provided power adapter It is very convenient to provide a backup power supply for the PDs o Flexibility In compliance with IEEE 802 3af and IEEE 802 3at global organizations can deploy PoE everywhere without concern for any loc
79. 2 3 DoS Defend DoS Denial of Service Attack is to occupy the network bandwidth maliciously by the network attackers or the evil programs sending a lot of service requests to the Host which incurs an abnormal service or even breakdown of the network 164 With DoS Defend function enabled the switch can analyze the specific fields of the IP packets and distinguish the malicious DoS attack packets Upon detecting the packets the switch will discard the illegal packets directly and limit the transmission rate of the legal packets if the over legal packets may incur a breakdown of the network The switch can defend a few types of DoS attack listed in the following table DoS Attack Type Description Land Attack The attacker sends a specific fake SYN packet to the destination Host Since both the source IP address and the destination IP address of the SYN packet are set to be the IP address of the Host the Host will be trapped in an endless circle for building the initial connection The performance of the network will be reduced extremely Scan SYNFIN The attacker sends the packet with its SYN field and the FIN field set to 1 The SYN field is used to request initial connection whereas the FIN field is used to request disconnection Therefore the packet of this type is illegal The switch can defend this type of illegal packet Xmascan The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP index FIN URG and PSH field
80. 2 3 and Ethernet II encapsulation formats are supported in IP protocol ARP protocol and RARP protocol but not supported in all protocols The switch identifies the protocol of the packets by matching eigenvalues of two encapsulation formats 60 gt The Procedure for the Switch to Identify Packet Protocol Packets arriving at FE GE ports x0800 to OxFFFF type Length YES FF DSAP SSAP Other values gt The Implementation of Protocol VLAN This Switch can match packets through protocol template and transmit packets in the specific VLAN according to the protocol Protocol template comprising encapsulation format and protocol type is the standard to determine the protocol which a packet belongs to The following table shows the common used encapsulation formats supported in network layer protocol and the protocol templates are for reference Meanwhile some protocol templates has been preset in the Ox5DD to OX5FF Invalid packet NO Invalid packet switch you can create protocol VLAN according to the corresponding protocol template Encapsulation Ethernet II 802 3 raw 802 2LLC 802 2 SNAP Protocol IP Ox0800 Not Not Supported supported supported supported IPX 0x8137 Supported Supported Supported Supported AppleTalk 0x809B gt Not Not Supported supported uppon8d Supported Table 6 2 Protocol types in common use The packet in Protocol VLAN is processed in the following
81. 2 seconds Max Age Enter a value from 6 to 40 in seconds to specify the maximum time the switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure The default value is 20 seconds Forward Delay Enter a value from 4 to 30 in seconds to specify the time for the port to transit its state after the network topology is changed 2 Forward Delay 1 2 Max Age The default value is 15 seconds TxHold Count Enter a value from 1 to 20 to set the maximum number of BPDU packets transmitted per Hello Time interval The default value is 5pps Max Hops Enter a value from 1 to 40 to set the maximum number of hops that occur in a specific region before the BPDU is discarded The default value is 20 hops n ote il The forward delay parameter and the network diameter are correlated A too small forward delay parameter may result in temporary loops A too large forward delay may cause a network unable to resume the normal state in time The default value is recommended An adequate hello time parameter can enable the switch to discover the link failures occurred in the network without occupying too much network resources A too large hello time parameter may result in normal links being regarded as invalid when packets drop occurred in the links which in turn result in spanning tree being regenerated A too small hello time parameter may result in duplicated configuration being sent frequently which increases the network load of t
82. 4 In this way when scheduling queues the switch allows TC3 to occupy the whole bandwidth following the SP mode and the TCO TC1 and TC2 in the WRR group will take up the bandwidth according to their ratio 1 2 4 Equal Mode In this mode all the queues occupy the bandwidth equally The weight value ratio of all the queues is 1 1 1 1 114 9 1 3 802 1P Priority On this page you can configure 802 1P priority 802 1P gives the Pri field in 802 1Q tag a recommended definition This field is used to divide packets into 8 priorities When 802 1P Priority is enabled the packets with 802 1Q tag are mapped to different priority levels based on 802 1P priority mode The untagged packets are mapped based on port priority mode Choose the menu QoS DiffServ 802 1P Priority to load the following page Priority Level Priority Tag en Mi Priority Level S Priority Tag Priority Level Priority Tag Priority Level 0 TC1 1 TCO 2 TCO 3 TC1 4 TC2 5 TC2 6 TC3 7 TC3 Apply note Among the priority levels TCO TC1 TC3 the bigger value the higher priority Figure 9 8 802 1P Priority The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Priority Level Priority Tag Indicates the precedence level defined by IEEE802 1P Priority Level Indicates the priority level the packets with tag are mapped to The priority levels are labeled as TC 0 TC1 TC2 and TC3 Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Configure the mappi
83. 4Kbps that closest to the rate you entered as the real Egress rate LAG Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to An ote 1 If you enable ingress rate limit feature for the storm control enabled port storm control feature will be disabled for this port 2 When selecting Manual to set Ingress Egress rate the system will automatically select integral multiple of 64Kbps that closest to the rate you entered as the real Ingress Egress rate For example if you enter 1023Kbps for egress rate the system will automatically select 1024Kbps as the real Egress rate 3 When egress rate limit feature is enabled for one or more ports you are suggested to disable the flow control on each port to ensure the switch works normally 9 2 2 Storm Control Storm Control function allows the switch to filter broadcast multicast and UL frame in the network If the transmission rate of the three kind packets exceeds the set bandwidth the packets will be automatically discarded to avoid network broadcast storm Choose the menu QoS gt Bandwitdth Control gt Storm Control to load the following page 118 Storm Control Config pot __ select Select Port Broadcast Rate bps Multicast Rate bps UL Frame Rate bps LAG O 128K _ 128K 128K O 1 O 2 O 3 O 4 O 5 O 6 E O 7 O 8 O g O 10 O 11 O 12 v Note For one port you cannot enable the Storm Control and the Ingress rat
84. 8 5 and mask as 255 255 255 255 configure the time range as No Limit On ACL gt Policy Config Policy Create page create a policy named limit2 On ACL gt Policy Config Action Create page add ACL 101 to Policy limit1 On ACL gt Policy Binding gt Port Binding page select Policy limit2 to bind to port 4 Return to CONTENTS 146 Chapter 12 Network Security Network Security module is to provide the multiple protection measures for the network security including four submenus IP MAC Binding ARP Inspection DoS Defend and 802 1X Please configure the functions appropriate to your need 12 1 IP MAC Binding The IP MAC Binding function allows you to bind the IP address MAC address VLAN ID and the connected Port number of the Host together Based on the IP MAC binding table and ARP Inspection functions you can control the network access and only allow the Hosts matching the bound entries to access the network The following three IP MAC Binding methods are supported by the switch 1 Manually You can manually bind the IP address MAC address VLAN ID and the Port number together in the condition that you have got the related information of the Hosts in the LAN 2 Scanning You can quickly get the information of the IP address MAC address VLAN ID and the connected port number of the Hosts in the LAN via the ARP Scanning function and bind them conveniently You are only requested to enter the range of the IP address
85. 802 1Q VLAN page configure the link type of the related ports as Trunk and add the ports to VLAN 101 and VLAN 106 The detailed instructions can be found in the section 802 1Q VLAN 2 Enable STP function On Spanning Tree gt STP Config STP Config page enable STP function and select MSTP version On Spanning Tree gt STP Config Port Config page enable MSTP function for the port 3 Configure the region name and On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance Region Config the revision of MST region page configure the region as TP LINK and keep the default revision setting 4 Configure VLAN to Instance On Spanning Tree gt MSTP Instance gt Instance mapping table of the MST region Config page configure VLAN to Instance mapping table Map VLAN 101 103 and 105 to Instance 1 map VLAN 102 104 and 106 to Instance 2 e Configure Switch B Step Operation Description 1 Configure ports On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN page configure the link type of the related ports as Trunk and add the ports to VLAN 101 and VLAN 106 The detailed instructions can be found in the section 802 1Q VLAN 2 Enable STP function On Spanning Tree gt STP Config STP Config page enable STP function and select MSTP version On Spanning Tree gt STP Config Port Config page enable MSTP function for the port 3 Configure the region name and On Spanning Tree gt MSTP Instance gt Region Config the revision of MST region page configure the region as T
86. 802 3 encapsulation contains the following three extended formats e 802 3 raw encapsulation DA amp SA 12 Length 2 _ Only the Length field is encapsulated after source MAC address field and destination MAC address field followed by DATA field without other fields Currently only IPX protocol supports 802 3 raw encapsulation format The last two bytes of the Length field in 802 3 raw encapsulation is OxFFFF e 802 2LLC Logic Link Control encapsulation The Length field DSAP Destination Service Access Point field SSAP Source Service Access Point field and Control field are encapsulated after source MAC address field and destination MAC address field The value of Control field is always 3 DSAP field and SSAP field in 802 2 LLC encapsulation are used to identify the upper layer protocol for example when both the two fields are OxE0 it indicates the upper layer protocol is IPX e 802 2 SNAP Sub Network Access Protocol is encapsulated based on 802 3 standard packets In 802 2 SNAP encapsulation the values of both DSAP field and SSAP field are always OXAA and the value of Control field is 3 The Switch differentiates 802 2 LLC and 802 2 SNAP encapsulation formats according to the values of DSAP field and SSAP field The device determines the encapsulation format of its sending packets and a device can send out packets of two encapsulation formats Ethernet ll encapsulation format is the most common used one currently 80
87. AN Disable The processing mode for the device to deal with the packet is determined by whether the port Recker witrothe LAN IAG permits the VLAN or not independent of voice VLAN security mode Table 9 3 Security mode and packets processing mode 121 aan ote Don t transmit voice stream together with other business packets in the voice VLAN except for some special requirements The Voice VLAN function can be implemented on Global Config Port Config and OUI Config pages 9 3 1 Global Config On this page you can configure the global parameters of the voice VLAN including VLAN ID aging time the transmission priority of the voice packets and so on Choose the menu QoS gt Voice VLAN gt Global Config to load the following page Global Config Voice VLAN O Enable Disable VLAN ID 2 4094 A apply Aging Time 1440 min 1 43200 default 1440 Help Priority 6 vw Figure 9 12 Global Configuration The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config Voice VLAN Select Enable Disable Voice VLAN function VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID of the voice VLAN Aging Time Specifies the living time of the member port in auto mode after the OUI address is aging out Priority Select the priority of the port when sending voice data 9 3 2 Port Config Before the voice VLAN function is enabled the parameters of the ports in the voice VLAN should be configured on this page Choose the men
88. AP format and its PID is 809B 5 Create Protocol On VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Protocol Group page create protocol VLAN 10 VLAN 10 with Protocol as IP and tick Port 3 6 Create Protocol On VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Protocol Group page create protocol VLAN 20 VLAN 20 with Protocol as AppleTalk and tick Port 3 6 7 GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is an implementation of GARP generic attribute registration protocol GVRP allows the switch to automatically add or remove the VLANs via the dynamic VLAN registration information and propagate the local VLAN registration information to other switches without having to individually configure each VLAN gt GARP GARP provides the mechanism to assist the switch members in LAN to deliver propagate and register the information among the members GARP itself does not work as the entity among the devices The application complied with GARP is called GARP implementation and GVRP is the implementation of GARP When GARP is implemented on a port of device the port is called GARP entity The information exchange between GARP entities is completed by messages GARP defines the messages into three types Join Leave and LeaveAll e Join Message When a GARP entity expects other switches to register certain attribute information of its own it sends out a Join message And when receiving the Join message 69 from the other entity or configuring some attributes statically the device also
89. Auto L we O 11 128 Auto a O 12 128 Auto gt bs BE O 13 128 Auto a O 14 128 Auto s O 15 128 Auto Es EN y Apply Note Ifthe Path Cost of a port is setto 0 it will alter automatically according to the port s link speed Figure 7 9 Instance Port Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Config Instance ID Select the desired instance ID for its port configuration Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select Select the desired port to specify its priority and path cost It is multi optional Port Displays the port number of the switch Priority Enter the priority of the port in the instance It is an important criterion on determining if the port connected to this port will be chosen as the root port Path Cost Path Cost is used to choose the path and calculate the path costs of ports in an MST region It is an important criterion on determining the root port The lower value has the higher priority Port Role Displays the role of the port played in the MSTP Instance Port Status Displays the working status of the port LAG Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to 85 aan ote The port status of one port in different spanning tree instances can be different Global configuration Procedure for Spanning Tree function Step Operation Description 1 Make clear roles t
90. Ave dene 7 2 3 2 Rear OS 9 Chapter 3 Login to the Switch ooocoonncccncccnnnccinnonooncccnnnoconnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnoncnnnnnnncnnnnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnninnns 10 3 1 LOMA a Soe a eA ue EE Gata eve Bethy 10 32 CONQUE ON RIAA EEA sates ocean de esha aes esse ia 10 Chapter SYStem aia Het Nee nage a e id cie ved 12 41 System INO moncloa 12 4 1 1 SYStSM SUMMA Ad eaten 12 4 1 2 Device Descriptio A A RA as 14 4 1 3 System TIMO irc DEEE 14 AMA System Pira o a a co 16 AZ User Manada pise 17 4 2 1 User TA il A A ee tie A 17 4 2 2 User Coi E E EAA 17 43 System Too Sisi italia 19 4 3 1 Config Restore oooocccccnocococccccncocononenonccnnnnoninnnnnonnnnnnnnnnncannnnnnnnnnnnincannnnnnnninincnnns 19 4 3 2 Config Backup viaria 19 4 3 3 Firmware U pgrad iii ia ine i A A a t 20 4 3 4 i System Reboot sarie a a A e e e ebia 21 4 3 9 System RESeb sc arara akaa aaa Ea E a cbealladecouveSieeesds 21 AA ACCESS SECUTA A lige peer iaeads 21 4 4 1 Access Controla dl 21 AAD SSECONNG 28 igh A esta eae P toa 23 44 3 SSA COMO iaa a ed eta 24 Chapters SWitChinGy 2cnes Pisces cared dentate deve binge idee AA de Got A ds 30 5 1 A O 30 5 1 1 Port Conil ras 30 5 1 2 POR IMIMOG sai ra dd ote aut cals robada 31 5 1 3 POP SecurI Y soriana aaaea aaia koaien 33 5 1 4 Port SOON hee eae a ian ince ode een eae 35 e RA o ha al sedate 36 52A LAS TA a A re eee 36 5 227 A O A Uae Rr Pon ET 38 e A PMC Oise siete tees acca aa a
91. Basic Config e ea r a aara aaa aAa a a tas a led sola a aatia 195 14 1 1 Global Cofidis eeen aa aea a kaeaea ceed Aeae DEN Ah 195 1412 Port Coin AA ss 196 14 2 Devico MO ucraniana 197 14210 Local INFO ooo ee eee center a a a a e a 197 142 2 Neighbor Info iria 198 14 3 Device Statisti iia a At ias 199 14 4 ELDR MED rarr a an a ea ecg Bataan eerste a aea 200 1441 Global Confidential 201 1442 n A NT 201 144 3 Moca MO ideo Bale 203 14 4 4 Neighbor Into seee coat rindan 204 Chapter 10 Cluster cita A A nin ee ne ly 206 151 A CO 207 15 11 Neighbor MO Lai NA A A AAA A AAA 207 15 1 2 NDP SUMMA len dentes 208 103 NDP CONG a san ase 210 Ds TD tati 211 15 21 DEVICE Table iia A deen 211 15 22 NT DP SUMMALY conti iia 212 e NTDP COMO se tetea tel eetea ced htc ae ost ie eea taaa aieea aiit 214 15 3 O A a OA 215 15 3 1 Cluster SUMMARY uscar a iii 215 15 325 Cluster Config menn A A ed A 216 15 4 Application Example for Cluster Function ooononococonnnccccconconcocccnncononnnanonononononnanannnnos 218 VIII Chapter 16 Maintenance ccccccccecceecnceceeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeesesccneeaeeeseeeseeeeeasaneeeeeeesees 221 16 1 System MONITOR cerca iran era AAT 221 16 1 1 CPU Monitor eestor eteh cates Secreta eal teced ates tcteretapaehell tee dee ee aatet tn neat ane 221 16 1 2 Memory Monitor cidos cacao alar 222 162 AO di 223 16 21 Eog A aRR te mn E On ers TR ene 224 16 2 2 Loca EOG ce2c e a east ce
92. CL page select ACL 100 create Rule 1 configure operation as Deny configure S IP as 172 31 70 1 and mask as 255 255 255 0 configure D IP as 172 31 50 1 and mask as 255 255 255 0 configure the time range as No Limit On ACL ACL Config Standard IP ACL page select ACL 100 create Rule 2 configure operation as Deny configure S IP as 172 31 70 1 and mask as 255 255 255 0 configure D IP as 172 31 88 5 and mask as 255 255 255 255 configure the time range as No Limit On ACL gt 5ACL Config Standard IP ACL page select ACL 100 create Rule 3 configure operation as Permit configure S IP as 172 31 70 1 and mask as 255 255 255 0 configure D IP as 172 31 88 5 and mask as 255 255 255 0 configure the time range as work_time On ACL gt Policy Config Action Create page add ACL 100 to Policy limit On ACL gt Policy Binding Port Binding page select Policy limit1 to bind to port 3 Configure requirement and 4 for 3 On ACL ACL Config ACL Create page create ACL 101 On ACL ACL Config Standard IP ACL page select ACL 101 create Rule 1 configure operation as Deny configure S IP as 172 31 70 1 and mask as 255 255 255 0 configure D IP as 172 31 50 1 and mask as 255 255 255 0 configure the time range as No Limit On ACL ACL Config Standard IP ACL page select ACL 101 create Rule 2 configure operation as Deny configure S IP as 172 31 70 1 and mask as 255 255 255 0 configure D IP as 172 31 8
93. DP information and neighboring connection information of each device in a specific network range The commander switch can collects the specified topology in the network regularly and you can also enable topology collection manually on the commander switch After the commander switch sends out NTDP request packets lots of switches receive the request packets and send out response packets at the same time which may result in network congestion and the commander switch overload To avoid the above problem two time parameters are designed to control the spread speed of NTDP request packets e NTDP hop delay Indicates the time between the switch receiving NTDP request packets and the switch forwarding NTDP request packets for the first time e NTDP port delay Indicates the time between the port forwarding NTDP request packets and its adjacent port forwarding NTDP request packets over The NTDP function can be implemented on Device Table NTDP Summary and NTDP Comfit pages 15 2 1 Device Table On this page you can view the information of the devices collected by NTDP Meanwhile no matter whether a cluster is established on this page you can manually collect NTDP information at any time to manage and control devices Choose the menu Cluster NTDP Device Table to load the following page Device Table Device Type Device MAC Cluster Name Role Hops Neighbor Info TL 8L5428 1 0 00 00 54 28 00 04 Candidate 1 Detail TL 563424P 1 0 00 14 78 0
94. Description 1 Configure the Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page configure the Link Type of the link type of Port 11 and Port 12 as GENERAL and TRUNK respectively ports 2 Create VLAN10 Required On VLAN 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLANID as 10 owning Port 11 and Port 12 and configure the egress rule of Port 11 as Untag 3 Create VLAN20 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLANID as 20 owning Port 11 and Port 12 and configure the egress rule of Port 11 as Untag 4 Configure MAC On VLAN gt MAC VLAN page create MAC VLAN10 with the MAC VLAN 10 address as 00 19 56 8A 4C 71 5 Configure MAC On VLAN gt MAC VLAN page create MAC VLAN10 with the MAC VLAN 20 address as 00 19 56 82 3B 70 e Configure Switch B Step Operation Description 1 Configure the Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN Port Config page configure the Link Type of the link type of Port 21 and Port 22 as GENERAL and TRUNK respectively ports 2 Create VLAN10 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLANID as 10 owning Port 21 and Port 22 and configure the egress rule of Port 21 as Untag 3 Create VLAN20 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLANID as 20 owning Port 21 and Port 22 and configure the egress rule of Port 21 as Untag 67 Configure MAC On
95. Description 1 Set the link type for Required On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page set port the link type for the port based on its connected device 2 Create VLAN Required On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page click the Create button to create a VLAN Enter the VLAN ID and the description for the VLAN Meanwhile specify its member ports 3 Create MAC VLAN Required On the VLAN gt MAC VLAN page create the MAC VLAN For the device in a MAC VLAN it s required to set its connected port of switch to be a member of this VLAN so as to ensure the normal communication 6 3 Protocol VLAN Protocol VLAN is another way to classify VLANs based on network protocol Protocol VLANs can be sorted by IP IPX DECnet AppleTalk Banyan and so on Through the Protocol VLANs the broadcast domain can span over multiple switches and the Host can change its physical position in the network with its VLAN member role always effective By creating Protocol VLANs the network administrator can manage the network clients based on their actual applications and services effectively Protocol VLAN another way to classify VLANs based on network protocol can bind ToS provided in the network to VLAN to realize the specific service Through protocol VLAN the switch can analyze the received un VLAN tagged packets on the port and match the packets with the user defined protocol template according to different encapsulation formats a
96. Disable O 7 Enable Disable Disable Disable O 8 Enable Disable Disable Disable O 9 Enable Disable Disable Disable O 10 Enable Disable Disable Disable v Figure 12 8 DHCP Snooping An ote If you want to enable the DHCP Snooping feature for the member port of LAG please ensure the parameters of all the member ports are the same The following entries are displayed on this screen gt DHCP Snooping Config DHCP Snooping Enable Disable the DHCP Snooping function globally 155 Global Flow Control Decline Threshold Decline Flow Control Option 82 Config Option 82 Support Existed Option 82 field Customization Circuit ID Remote ID Port Config Port Select Select Port Trusted Port MAC Verify Flow Control Decline Protect LAG Select the value to specify the maximum amount of DHCP messages that can be forwarded by the switch per second The excessive massages will be discarded Select the value to specify the minimum transmission rate of the Decline packets to trigger the Decline protection for the specific port Select the value to specify the Decline Flow Control The traffic flow of the corresponding port will be limited to be this value if the transmission rate of the Decline packets exceeds the Decline Threshold Enable Disable the Option 82 feature Select the operation for the Option 82 field of the DHCP request packets from the Host Keep In
97. Disable sec 3 300 Auto Refresh O Enable Refresh Rate Local Info Local Interface 1 Chassis ID Subtype Chassis ID Port ID Subtype Port ID TIE 0 Port Description Reserved Reserved System Mame System Description System Capabilities Supported System Capabilities Enabled 0 0 0 0 Management Address Figure 14 3 LLDP Local Information The following entries are displayed on this screen 197 Port 1 select Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Refresh Rate Local Info Enable Disable the auto refresh function Specify the auto refresh rate Enter the desired port number and click Select to display the information of the corresponding port 14 2 2 Neighbor Info On this page you can get the information of the neighbors Choose the menu LLDP Device Info Neighbor Info to load the following page Local Port Auto Refresh Auto Refresh O Enable Disable Apply Refresh Rate sec 3 300 Neighbor Info Port o System Name Chassis IB System Description Neighbor Port Infomation Figure 14 4 LLDP Neighbor Information The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Refresh Rate Neighbor Info Port Select Local Port System Name Chassis ID System Description Neighbor Port Information Enable Disable the auto refresh function Specify the auto refresh rate Click the Select button to quick se
98. Displays the MAC Address of the Host VLAN ID Displays the VLAN ID here Port Displays the number of port connected to the Host Protect Type Displays the Protect Type of the entry Collision Displays the Collision status of the entry e Warning Indicates that the collision may be caused by the MSTP function e Critical Indicates that the entry has a collision with the other entries 149 12 1 3 ARP Scanning ARP Address Resolution Protocol is used to analyze and map IP addresses to the corresponding MAC addresses so that packets can be delivered to their destinations correctly IP address is the address of the Host on Network layer MAC address the address of the Host on Data link layer is necessary for the packet to reach the very device So the destination IP address carried in a packet need to be translated into the corresponding MAC address ARP functions to translate the IP address into the corresponding MAC address and maintain an ARP Table where the latest used IP address to MAC address mapping entries are stored When the Host communicates with a strange Host ARP works as the following figure shown IP 192 168 0 102 IP 192 168 0 103 he MAC 00 01 21 AF OF 4E MAC 00 0F 12 0E ED 2D Hosta ARP Request Broadcast Hos Source IP address Source MAC address Destination IP address Destination MAC address 192 168 0 102 00 01 21 AF 0F 4E 192 168 0 103 FF FF FF FF FF FF Source IP address Source MAC address Desti
99. Duplex Figure 15 6 Information of the Current Device 15 2 2 NTDP Summary On this page you can view the NTDP configuration Choose the menu Cluster NTDP NTDP Summary to load the following page 212 Global Config NTDP NTDP Interval Time NTDP Hops NTDP Hop Delay NTDP Port Delay Port Status Port sa nw 13 15 17 19 21 23 Enable 1 min 3 hop 200 ms 20 ms NTDP Port NTDP Enable 2 Enable Enable 4 Enable Enable 6 Enable Enable 8 Enable Enable 10 Enable Enable 12 Enable Enable 14 Enable Enable 16 Enable Enable 18 Enable Enable 20 Enable Enable 22 Enable Enable 24 Enable Figure 15 7 NTDP Summary The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config NTDP NTDP Interval Time NTDP Hops NTDP Hop Delay NTDP Port Delay Port Status Port NTDP Displays the NTDP status enabled or disabled of the switch globally Displays the interval to collect topology information Displays the hop count the switch topology collects Displays the time between the switch receiving NTDP request packets and the switch forwarding NTDP request packets for the first time Displays the time between the port forwarding NTDP request packets and its adjacent port forwarding NTDP request packets over Displays the port number of the switch Displays NTDP status enabled or disabled of the current port 213 15 2 3 NTDP Config On this page you can configure NTDP glob
100. Figure D 9 Preparing Setup 3 On the continued screen click Yes to remove the application from your PC TpSupplicant 2 0 InstallShield Wizard Do you want to completely remove the selected application and all of its features Figure D 10 Uninstall the Application 4 Click Finish to complete TpSupplicant 2 0 InstallShield Wizard Uninstall Complete InstallShield Wizard has finished uninstalling TpSupplicant V2 0 Cancel Figure D 11 Uninstall Complete 3 Configuration 1 After completing installation double click the icon a to run the TP LINK 802 1X Client Software The following screen will appear 244 IP LINK 802 1 Client A TP LINK Name Password M Save password Language English Network Realtek RTL8139 Family PCI Fast E y Connectie Properties P Exito Figure D 12 TP LINK 802 1X Client Enter the Name and the Password specified in the Authentication Server The length of Name and Password should be less than 15 characters 2 Click the Properties button on Figure D 12 to load the following screen for configuring the connection properties Connection properties 802 1 network connection DHCP Obtain an IP address automatically General Auto reconnect after timeout Default P OK 0 Cancel C Figure D 13 Connection Properties Send 802 1X protocol packets by Unicast When this option is selected the Client will send the EAPOL Star
101. File Select the desired key file to download Download Click the Download button to download the desired key file to the switch n ote 1 Please ensure the key length of the downloaded file is in the range of 256 to 3072 bits 2 After the Key File is downloaded the user s original key of the same type will be replaced The wrong uploaded file will result in the SSH access to the switch via Password authentication Application Example 1 for SSH gt Network Requirements 1 Log on to the switch via password authentication using SSH and the SSH function is enabled on the switch 2 PuTTY client software is recommended gt Configuration Procedure 1 Open the software to log on to the interface of PuTTY Enter the IP address of the switch into Host Name field keep the default value 22 in the Port field select SSH as the Connection type X Pul TY Configuration Category amp Session A Basic options for your PuTTY session Logging Specify the destination you want to connect to E Terminal Host Name or IP address Port Keyboard Bell 1192 168 0 1 22 Features Connection type E Window ORaw O Telnet O Rlogin SSH Serial Appearance Behaviour Translation Saved Sessions Load save or delete a stored session Selection Colours D P i Default Settings Load S Connection Load Data Save Proxy _Save_ Telnet login E SSH Close window on exit O lways O Never Only on cle
102. GMP query messages After receiving the IGMP query messages the switch will remove the port from the multicast address table if the switch receives no IGMP report message from the host within a period of time gt IGMP Messages The switch running IGMP Snooping processes the IGMP messages of different types as follows 1 IGMP Query Message IGMP query message sent by the router falls into two types IGMP general query message and IGMP group specific query message The router regularly sends IGMP general message to query if the multicast groups contain any member When receiving IGMP leave message the receiving port of the router will send IGMP group specific query message to the multicast group and the switch will forward IGMP group specific query message to check if other members in the multicast group of the port need this multicast When receiving IGMP general query message the switch will forward them to all other ports in the VLAN owning the receiving port The receiving port will be processed if the receiving port is nota router port yet it will be added to the router port list with its router port time specified if the receiving port is already a router port its router port time will be directly reset When receiving IGMP group specific query message the switch will send the group specific query message to the members of the multicast group being queried 2 IGMP Report Message IGMP report message is sent by the host when it a
103. Here mainly introduces e SNMP Config Configure global settings of SNMP function e Notification Configure notification function for the management station to monitor and process the events e RMON Configure RMON function to monitor network more efficiently Chapter Introduction Chapter 14 LLDP This module is used to configure LLDP function to provide information for SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting Here mainly introduces e Basic Config Configure the LLDP parameters of the device e Device Info View the LLDP information of the local device and its neighbors e Device Statistics View the LLDP statistics of the local device e LLDP MED Configure LLDP MED parameters of the device Chapter 15 Cluster This module is used to configure cluster function to central manage the scattered devices in the network Here mainly introduces e NDP Configure NDP function to get the information of the directly connected neighbor devices e NTDP Configure NTDP function for the commander switch to collect NDP information e Cluster Configure cluster function to establish and maintain cluster Chapter 16 Maintenance This module is used to assemble the commonly used system tools to manage the switch Here mainly introduces e System Monitor Monitor the memory and CPU of the switch e Log View configuration parameters on the switch e Device Diagnose Test the connection status of the cable c
104. LAG to which the port belongs 6 1 2 Port Config Before creating the 802 1Q VLAN please acquaint yourself with all the devices connected to the switch in order to configure the ports properly Choose the menu VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config to load the following page VLAN Port Config Port Select Port Link Type PYID LAG VLAN O ACCESS w O 1 ACCESS 1 Detail A O 2 ACCESS 1 Detail O 3 ACCESS 1 Detail O 4 ACCESS 1 Detail O 5 ACCESS 1 Detail O 6 ACCESS 1 Detail O 7 ACCESS 1 Detail O 8 ACCESS 1 Detail d O g ACCESS 1 Detail O 10 ACCESS 1 Detail O 11 ACCESS 1 Detail O 12 ACCESS 1 Detail O 13 ACCESS 1 Detail O 14 ACCESS 1 Detail v Apply Figure 6 5 802 1Q VLAN Port Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt VLAN Port Config Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding entry based on the port number you entered Select Select the desired port for configuration It is multi optional Port Displays the port number 56 Link Type Select the Link Type from the pull down list for the port e ACCESS The ACCESS port can be added in a single VLAN and the egress rule of the port is UNTAG The PVID is same as the current VLAN ID If the current VLAN is deleted the PVID will be set to 1 by default e TRUNK The TRUNK port can be added in multiple VLANs and the egress rule of the port is TAG The PVID can be set as the VID n
105. LV TLV TLV M M M mandatory TLV required for all LLDPDUs The maximum length of the LLDPDU shall be the maximum information field length allowed by the particular transmission rate and protocol In IEEE 802 3 MACs for example the maximum LLDPDU length is the maximum data field length for the basic untagged MAC frame 1500 octets gt LLDP Working Mechanism 1 LLDP Admin Status The transmission and the reception of LLDPDUs can be separately enabled for every port making it possible to configure an implementation to restrict the port either to transmit only or receive only or to allow the port to both transmit and receive LLDPDUs Four LLDP admin statuses are supported by each port 191 e Tx amp Rx the port can both transmit and receive LLDPDUs e Rx_Only the port can receive LLDPDUs only e Tx_Only the port can transmit LLDPDUs only O Disable the port cannot transmit or receive LLDPDUs 2 LLDPDU transmission mechanism o If the ports are working in TxRx or Tx mode they will advertise local information by sending LLDPDUs periodically o If there is a change in the local device the change notification will be advertised To prevent a series of successive LLDPDUs transmissions during a short period due to frequent changes in local device a transmission delay timer is set by network management to ensure that there is a defined minimum time between successive LLDP frame transmissions o If the LLDP admin status of the
106. Meanwhile specify its member ports 3 Modify View VLAN Optional On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page click the Edit Detail button to modify view the information of the corresponding VLAN 4 Delete VLAN Optional On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page select the desired entry to delete the corresponding VLAN by clicking the Delete button 6 2 MAC VLAN MAC VLAN technology is the way to classify VLANs according to the MAC addresses of Hosts A MAC address corresponds to a single VLAN ID For the device in a MAC VLAN if its MAC address is bound to VLAN the device can be connected to another member port in this VLAN and still takes its member role effect without changing the configuration of VLAN members The packet in MAC VLAN is processed in the following way 1 When receiving an untagged packet the switch matches the packet with the current MAC VLAN If the packet is matched the switch will add a corresponding MAC VLAN tag to it If no MAC VLAN is matched the switch will add a tag to the packet according to the PVID of the received port Thus the packet is assigned automatically to the corresponding VLAN for transmission 2 When receiving tagged packet the switch will process it based on the 802 1Q VLAN If the received port is the member of the VLAN to which the tagged packet belongs the packet will be forwarded normally Otherwise the packet will be discarded 3 Ifthe MAC address of
107. N by checking whether the port receives voice data or not Manual In this mode you can manually add a port to the voice VLAN or remove a port from the voice VLAN 123 Security Mode Member State LAG 9 3 3 OUI Config Configure the security mode for forwarding packets e Disable All packets are forwarded Enable Only voice data are forwarded Displays the state of the port in the current voice VLAN Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to The switch supports OUI create and add the MAC address of the special voice device to the OUI table of the switch The switch determines whether a received packet is a voice packet by checking its OUI address The switch analyzes the received packets If the packets recognized as voice packets the access port will be automatically added to the Voice VLAN Choose the menu QoS gt Voice VLAN OUI Config to load the following page Format 00 00 00 00 00 01 FF FF FF 00 00 00 Default FF FF FF 00 00 00 16 characters maximum Create OUI oul Mask Description OUI Table Select oul Fj 00 01 e3 00 00 00 O 00 03 6b 00 00 00 g 00 04 0a 00 00 00 go 00 60 b9 00 00 00 Fi 00 d0 1e 00 00 00 O 00 e0 75 00 00 00 dl 00 e0 bb 00 00 00 All Figure 9 14 OUI Configuration Mask Ef f I ff D0 00 00 ff ff ff 00 00 00 f f ff ff 00 00 00 ff ff ff 00 00 00 ff ff f f 00 00 00 ff ff ff 00 00 00 Ef f f 00 00 00 The follow
108. N to different instances appropriate to your needs Every instance is a VLAN group independent of other instances and CIST Choose the menu Spanning Tree MSTP Instance Instance Config to load the following page Instance Table Instance ID Select Instance Status Priority VLAN ID O Disable v O 1 Disable 32768 Clear O 2 Disable 32768 Clear O 3 Disable 32768 Clear O 4 Disable 32768 Clear O 5 Disable 32768 Clear O 6 Disable 32768 Clear O 7 Disable 32768 Clear O 8 Disable 32768 Clear CIST Enable 32768 1 4094 VLAN Instance Mapping VLAN ID 1 4094 Instance ID 0 8 Dis the cist Apply Note The format of input YLAN ID shoud be like 1 3 4 7 11 30 in the range from 1 to 4094 Figure 7 8 Instance Config 83 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Instance Table Instance ID Select Select Instance Status Priority VLAN ID Clear Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding Instance ID based on the ID number you entered Select the desired Instance ID for configuration It is multi optional Displays Instance ID of the switch Select Enable Disable the instance Enter the priority of the switch in the instance It is an important criterion on determining if the switch will be chosen as the root bridge in the specific instance Enter the VLAN ID which belongs to the corresponding instance ID After modification here th
109. P LINK and keep the default revision setting 4 Configure VLAN to Instance On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance gt Instance mapping table of the MST region Config page configure WLAN to Instance mapping table Map VLAN 101 103 and 105 to Instance 1 map VLAN 102 104 and 106 to Instance 2 5 Configure switch B as the root On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance gt Instance bridge of Instance 1 Config page configure the priority of Instance 1 to be 0 6 Configure switch B as the On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance gt Instance designated bridge of Instance 2 Config page configure the priority of Instance 2 to be 4096 90 e Configure Switch C Step Operation Description 1 Configure ports On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN page configure the link type of the related ports as Trunk and add the ports to VLAN 101 and VLAN 106 The detailed instructions can be found in the section 802 1Q VLAN 2 Enable STP function On Spanning Tree gt STP Config STP Config page enable STP function and select MSTP version On Spanning Tree gt STP Config Port Config page enable MSTP function for the port 3 Configure the region name and On Spanning Tree MSTP Instance Region Config the revision of MST region page configure the region as TP LINK and keep the default revision setting 4 Configure VLAN to Instance On Spanning Tree MSTP _Instance Instance mapping table of the MST region Config page configure WLAN to Instanc
110. RX Disable Detail O 10 Tx amp Rx Disable Detail O 11 Tx amp RX Disable Detail O 12 Tx amp Rx Disable Detail O 13 Tx amp RX Disable Detail O 14 Tx amp RX Disable Detail v Apply Figure 14 2 LLDP Port Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt LLDP Port Config Port Select Select the desired port to configure Admin Status Select the ports LLDP operating mode Tx amp Rx send and receive LLDP frames e Rx_Only Only receive LLDP frames e Tx_Only Only send LLDP frames e Disable neither send nor receive LLDP frames Notification Mode Allows you to enable or disable the ports SNMP notification If enabled the local device will notify the trap event to SNMP server Included TLVs Select TLVs to be included in outgoing LLDPDU 196 Details TLVs Included TL s Port Description System Capabilities M system Name Y Management Address M VLAN Name Max Frame Size Port And Protocol VLAN ID MACIPHY Configuration Status Man 14 2 Device Info Click Details to display the included TLVs and select the desired System Description Port VLAN ID Link Aggregation Power Via MDI You can view the LLDP information of the local device and its neighbors on the Local Info and Neighbor Info pages respectively 14 2 1 Local Info On this page you can see all ports configuration and system information Choose the menu LLDP Device Info Local Info to load the following page Auto Refresh
111. TP LINK User Guide TL SG3424P JetStream L2 Managed PoE Switch Aa RAG AAGA i fte ba pa Yom LLL A dedo Rev 1 0 0 1910010614 COPYRIGHT amp TRADEMARKS Specifications are subject to change without notice TIP LINIK is a registered trademark of TP LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO LTD Other brands and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders No part of the specifications may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative such as translation transformation or adaptation without permission from TP LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO LTD Copyright 2012 TP LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO LTD All rights reserved http www tp link com FCC STATEMENT HE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy ana if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject t
112. The topology diagram of the two instances after the topology is stable e For Instance 1 VLAN 101 103 and 105 the red paths in the following figure are connected links the gray paths are the blocked links 91 Switch A a Switch C Switch D Switch E Switch F e For Instance 2 VLAN 102 104 and 106 the blue paths in the following figure are connected links the gray paths are the blocked links Switch A Switch D Switch E Switch F gt Suggestion for Configuration e Enable TC Protect function for all the ports of switches e Enable Root Protect function for all the ports of root bridges e Enable Loop Protect function for the non edge ports Enable BPDU Protect function or BPDU Filter function for the edge ports which are connected to the PC and server Return to CONTENTS 92 Chapter 8 Multicast gt Multicast Overview In the network packets are sent in three modes unicast broadcast and multicast In unicast the source server sends separate copy information to each receiver When a large number of users require this information the server must send many pieces of information with the same content to the users Therefore large bandwidth will be occupied In broadcast the system transmits information to all users in a network Any user in the network can receive the information no matter the information is needed or not Point to multipoint multimedia business such as video conferences and VoD
113. When the network is congested the problem that many packets complete for resources must be solved usually in the way of queue scheduling The switch will control the forwarding sequence of the packets according to the priority queues and scheduling algorithms you set On this switch the priority levels are labeled as TCO TC1 TC3 page select a schedule mode Choose the menu QoS DiffServ Schedule Mode to load the following page Schedule Mode Config Schedule Mode Equ Mode vi Figure 9 7 Schedule Mode The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Schedule Mode Config SP Mode WRR Mode SP WRR Mode Equ Mode Strict Priority Mode In this mode the queue with higher priority will occupy the whole bandwidth Packets in the queue with lower priority are sent only when the queue with higher priority is empty Weight Round Robin Mode In this mode packets in all the queues are sent in order based on the weight value for each queue The weight value ratio of TCO TC1 TC2 and TC3 is 1 2 4 8 Strict Priority Weight Round Robin Mode In this mode this switch provides two scheduling groups SP group and WRR group Queues in SP group and WRR group are scheduled strictly based on strict priority mode while the queues inside WRR group follow the WRR mode In SP WRR mode TC3 is in the SP group TCO TC1 and TC2 belong to the WRR group and the weight value ratio of TCO TC1 and TC2 is 1 2
114. a Host is classified into 802 1Q VLAN please set its connected port of switch to be a member of this 802 1Q VLAN so as to ensure the packets forwarded normally On this page you can create MAC VLAN and view the current MAC VLANs in the table Choose the menu VLAN MAC VLAN to load the following page Create MAC VLAN MAC Address Format 00 00 00 00 00 01 Create Description 8 characters maximum VLAN ID 1 4094 MAC VLAN Table MAC Address Select MAC Address Description LAN ID Operation No entry in the MAC VLAN table Al Figure 6 7 Create and View MAC VLAN 58 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt VLAN Table MAC Address Enter the MAC address Description Give a description to the MAC address for identification VLAN ID Enter the ID number of the MAC VLAN This VLAN should be one of the 802 1Q VLANs the ingress port belongs to gt MAC VLAN Table MAC Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding entry based on the MAC address you entered Select Select the desired entry It is multi optional MAC Address Displays the MAC address Description Displays the user defined description of the MAC address VLAN ID Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address Operation Click the Edit button to modify the settings of the entry And click the Modify button to apply your settings Configuration Procedure Step Operation
115. a device has been added to the Static Address Table connecting the device to another port will cause its address not to be recognized dynamically by the switch Therefore please ensure the entries in the Static Address Table are correct and valid 3 The MAC address in the Static Address Table can not be added to the Filtering Address Table or bound to a port dynamically 4 This static MAC address bound function is not available if the 802 1X feature is enabled 5 4 3 Dynamic Address The dynamic address can be generated by the auto learning mechanism of the switch The Dynamic Address Table can update automatically by auto learning or aging out the MAC address To fully utilize the MAC address table which has a limited capacity the switch adopts an aging mechanism for updating the table That is the switch removes the MAC address entries related to a network device if no packet is received from the device within the aging time On this page you can configure the dynamic MAC address entry Choose the menu Switching gt MAC Address gt Dynamic Address to load the following page 47 Aging Config Auto Aging Enable Disable Aging Time 300 sec 10 630 default 300 Search Option Search Option All v Dynamic Address Table Select MAC Address LAN ID Port Type Aging Status O 00 00 5E 00 01 02 1 6 Dynamic Aging O 00 04 EB 00 23 19 1 6 Dynamic Aging O 00 OF E2 F5 28 D7 1 6 Dynamic Aging O 0
116. aa Se dete hates ed hal a teeta cle E aa Salta 39 6 32 Trafi Moni micras ed 41 5 3 1 Trafic SUMMA Vias dde 41 5 332 Tralfic at ti A AA a AA aes 42 5d MAGA ESS til ia 43 5 4 1 Address Table iii it 44 DAZ Static Address estalla 46 5 4 3 Dynamic Address i ii in ill inl nln nnn nnn nl nn ill iil iii ii ine 47 5 4 4 Filtering Address iia a taa 49 Chapter 62 VA Nico 51 61 A A O 52 6 11 VEAN CONTO cui a ec ra 54 6 1 2 Port Config it Gh coe ne Ai ee ito ee 56 620 MACVEAN unreal tae e ta a noe e e a o ll o al 58 6 3 Protocol VEAN cra dias 59 6 3 1 Protocol Group Table cita let la tod Gel 62 6 3 2 Protocol Gro precenenie a Geel ties Ai A eee 62 6 3 3 Protocol Template eA RAN he AA atei 63 6 4 Application Example for 802 1Q VLAN ccccceceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneaaeeeeeeeeteceneeneaeeeeeeeess 65 6 5 Application Example for MAC VLAN cccceceeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeeeeeeseenieaeeeeeeeess 66 6 6 Application Example for Protocol VLAN cccceeeeecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeceneneaeeeteeeess 68 BT A i as eas elt a eA elec EE 69 Chapter 7 Spanning Tree i a ie a peta enhances ate dies eas Nh ised ae dee eee 73 GAY STP COMING cei aie Makati ret aie aan ie eh nes 78 TAE STP CONG eects ei cae he elas ta a Cin eae cade eh aa cee nse ae cae la ae Sereda 78 GAZ STPS UNI YAA Mee nae 80 AZ POCO A AA A AAA AAA AAA 80 137 MMSTP AnStanCe sucia 82 7 3 1 Region CON ini A A 82 7 3 2 I
117. able Disable the Guest VLAN feature Enter your desired VLAN ID to enable the Guest VLAN feature The supplicants in the Guest VLAN can access the specified network source Enable Disable the Quiet timer 171 Quiet Period Specify a value for Quiet Period Once the supplicant failed to the 802 1X Authentication then the switch will not respond to the authentication request from the same supplicant during the Quiet Period Retry Times Specify the maximum transfer times of the repeated authentication request Supplicant Timeout Specify the maximum time for the switch to wait for the response from supplicant before resending a request to the supplicant Server Timeout Specify the maximum time for the switch to wait for the response from authentication server before resending a request to the authentication server 12 4 2 Port Config On this page you can configure the 802 1X features for the ports based on the actual network Choose the menu Network Security gt 802 1X Port Config to load the following page Port Config Port Select Port Status Guest VLAN Control Mode Control Type Authorized LAG O Disable v Disable Auto v MAC Based w O 4 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes A O 2 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes Fl 3 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes Fj 4 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes O 5 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes O 6 Disable Disable Auto MAC Based Yes
118. ackets and updates its ARP table As a result the ARP table is fully occupied by the false entries and unable to learn the ARP entries of legal Hosts which causes that the legal Hosts can not access the external network The IP MAC Binding function allows the switch to bind the IP address MAC address VLAN ID 160 and the connected Port number of the Host together when the Host connects to the switch Based on the predefined IP MAC Binding entries the ARP Inspection functions to detect the ARP packets and filter the illegal ARP packet so as to prevent the network from ARP attacks The ARP Inspection function is implemented on the ARP Detect ARP Defend and ARP Statistics pages 12 2 1 ARP Detect ARP Detect feature enables the switch to detect the ARP packets based on the bound entries in the IP MAC Binding Table and filter the illegal ARP packets so as to prevent the network from ARP attacks such as the Network Gateway Spoofing and Man In The Middle Attack etc Choose the menu Network Security gt ARP Inspection ARP Detect to load the following page ARP Detect ARP Detect Trusted Port O 1 Fi 2 El 7 Os O13 O14 O19 O20 Note Enable Disable O 3 O a Os O 6 O a C10 Or C12 C15 C16 C17 O18 O2 F22 C123 O 24 It s recommended to configure the up linked port and LAG member as trusted port Figure 12 13 ARP Detect The following entries are displayed on this screen gt ARP Detect ARP Detect gt
119. al variance in AC power standards outlets plugs or reliability o Wide use It can be applied to wireless LAN access points IP Phones IP cameras network hubs embedded computers etc TL SG3424P L2 Managed PoE Switch is a Power Sourcing Equipment PSE All the Auto Negotiation RJ45 ports on the switch support Power over Ethernet PoE function which can automatically detect and supply power for those powered devices PDs complying with IEEE 802 3af and IEEE 802 3at The maximum power the TP LINK PoE switch can supply is 320W and the maximum power each PoE port can supply is 30W PoE function can be configured in the two sections PoE Config and PoE Time Range 10 1 PoE Config All the RJ45 ports on the switch can be configured to supply power for the powered devices that comply with IEEE 802 3af and IEEE 802 3at As the power every port or the system can provide is limited some attributes should be set to make full use of the power and guarantee the adequate power to the linked PDs When the power exceeds the maximum power limit or the power is inadequate to power the device the switch may disconnect the power supply to the specified linked powered device according to the configured rules When detecting a PD is unplugged the switch will stop supplying the power to the PD PoE Config mainly for PoE attributes configuration is implemented on PoE Config and PoE Profile pages 126 10 1 1 PoE Config On this page you can configu
120. ally Choose the menu Cluster NTDP NTDP Config to load the following page Global Config NTDP NTDP Interal Time NTDP Hops NTDP Hop Delay NTDP Port Delay Port Config Select Port WO w a w 13 15 17 19 21 23 OOOOOOO00000 All Enable Disable 1 min 1 60 default 1 3 hop 1 16 default 3 Apply 200 ms 1 1000 default 200 20 ms 1 100 default 20 NTDP Select Port NTDP Enable O 2 Enable Enable O 4 Enable Enable O 6 Enable Enable O 8 Enable Enable O 10 Enable Enable O 12 Enable Enable O 14 Enable Enable O 16 Enable Enable O 18 Enable Enable O 20 Enable Enable O 22 Enable Enable O 24 Enable Figure 15 8 NTDP Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config NTDP NTDP Interval Time NTDP Hops NTDP Hop Delay Select Enable Disable NTDP for the switch globally Enter the interval to collect topology information The default is 1 minute Enter the hop count the switch topology collects The default is 3 hops Enter the time between the switch receiving NTDP request packets and the switch forwarding NTDP request packets for the first time The default is 200 milliseconds 214 NTDP Port Delay Enter the time between the port forwarding NTDP request packets and its adjacent port forwarding NTDP request packets over The default is 20 milliseconds gt Port Config Select Select the desired port for NTDP
121. ampled value is under the Falling Threshold an alarm event is triggered 189 Interval Enter the alarm interval time in seconds Owner Enter the name of the device or user that defined the entry Status Select Enable Disable the corresponding alarm entry an ote When alarm variables exceed the Threshold on the same direction continuously for several times an alarm event will only be generated on the first time that is the Rising Alarm and Falling Alarm are triggered alternately for that the alarm following to Rising Alarm is certainly a Falling Alarm and vice versa Return to CONTENTS 190 Chapter 14 LLDP LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol is a Layer 2 protocol that is used for network devices to advertise their own device information periodically to neighbors on the same IEEE 802 local area network The advertised information including details such as device identification capabilities and configuration settings is represented in TLV Type Length Value format according to the IEEE 802 1ab standard and these TLVs are encapsulated in LLDPDU Link Layer Discovery Protocol Data Unit The LLDPDU distributed via LLDP is stored by its recipients in a standard MIB Management Information Base making it possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management System NMS using a management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP An IETF Standard MIB as well as a number of vendor specific
122. an exit 2 Click the Open button in the above figure to log on to the switch Enter the login user name and password and then you can continue to configure the switch 26 192 168 0 1 PuTIY login as admin Further authentication required admin 192 168 0 1 s password TP LINK gt Application Example 2 for SSH gt Network Requirements 1 Log on to the switch via password authentication using SSH and the SSH function is enabled on the switch 2 PuTTY client software is recommended gt Configuration Procedure 1 Select the key type and key length and generate SSH key g Pull Key Generator File Key Conversions Help Key No key Actions Generate a public private key pair Load an existing private key file Save the generated key Parameters Number of bits in a generated key Mote 1 The key length is in the range of 256 to 3072 bits 2 During the key generation randomly moving the mouse quickly can accelerate the key generation 2 After the key is successfully generated please save the public key and private key to the computer 27 g Pull Key Generator File Key Conversions Help Key Public key for pasting into OpenSSH authorized_keys file ssh tsa ASSABSNzaC1 po2EAAAABIOAAAIBo2aDYsiF WslaScst h nySwoU 3im7c4l2y 2lS 34 R4yeviF vR 4G zxaE CIMMISSwClhD wD b06b749Xim ZYIFL WWnaJOH49Nokrp 6mzQSRDSHJW8T Cx1 n3lVn lt 7dpu2ePeS95UKGeuE aT eV WfOvweR 2e5T CTDxWw Ke NQ
123. and add all the member ports and router ports to the VLAN on the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN page e Configure the link type of the member ports as GENERAL e Configure the link type of the router ports as TRUNK or configure the egress rule as tagged GENERAL 3 Configure parameters for Optional Enable and configure a multicast VLAN on the multicast VLAN Multicast IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN page It is recommended to keep the default time parameters 4 Look over the configuration If it is successfully configured the VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN will be displayed in the IGMP Snooping Status table on the Multicast IGMP Snooping Snooping Config page Application Example for Multicast VLAN gt Network Requirements Multicast source sends multicast streams via the router and the streams are transmitted to user A and user B through the switch Router Its WAN port is connected to the multicast source its LAN port is connected to the switch The multicast packets are transmitted in VLAN3 Switch Port 3 is connected to the router and the packets are transmitted in VLAN3 port 4 is connected to user A and the packets are transmitted in VLAN4 port 5 is connected to user B and the packets are transmitted in VLAN5 User A Connected to Port 4 of the switch User B Connected to port 5 of the switch Configure a multicast VLAN and user A and B receive multicast streams through the multicast VLAN gt Net
124. and enhance the process efficiency of the system Please configure this feature appropriate to your needs Choose the menu Multicast IGMP Snooping Snooping Config to load the following page 96 Global Config IGMP Snooping Enable Disable Unknown Multicast Forward Discard IGMP Snooping Status Description Member Enabled Port Enabled WYLAN Note IGMP Snooping will take effect only when Global Config Port Config and LAN Config are all enabled Figure 8 4 Basic Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config IGMP Snooping Select Enable Disable IGMP Snooping function globally on the Switch Unknown Multicast Select the operation for the switch to process unknown multicast Forward or Discard gt IGMP Snooping Status Description Displays IGMP Snooping status Member Displays the member of the corresponding status 8 1 2 Port Config On this page you can configure the IGMP feature for ports of the switch Choose the menu Multicast IGMP Snooping Port Config to load the following page 97 Port Config Select Port O O 1 O 2 O 3 O 4 O 5 O 6 O 7 O 8 O g O 10 O 11 O 12 Port IGMP Snooping Fast Leave LAG Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable E Disable Disable n Disable Disable m Disable Disable L Disable Disable a Disable Disable z Disable Disable lt
125. anning tree instances owning this port are configured as point to point links If the physical link of a port is not a point to point link and you forcibly configure the link as a point to point link temporary loops may be incurred 7 3 MSTP Instance MSTP combines VLANs and spanning tree together via VLAN to instance mapping table VLAN to spanning tree mapping By adding MSTP instances it binds several VLANs to an instance to realize the load balance based on instances Only when the switches have the same MST region name MST region revision and VLAN to Instance mapping table the switches can be regarded as in the same MST region The MSTP Instance function can be implemented on Region Config Instance Config and Instance Port Config pages 7 3 1 Region Config On this page you can configure the name and revision of the MST region Choose the menu Spanning Tree MSTP Instance Region Config to load the following page 82 Region Config Region Name 00 0a eb 00 13 01 Apply Revision 0 0 65535 Figure 7 7 Region Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Region Config Region Name Create a name for MST region identification using up to 32 characters Revision Enter the revision from 0 to 65535 for MST region identification 7 3 2 Instance Config Instance Configuration a property of MST region is used to describe the VLAN to Instance mapping configuration You can assign VLA
126. anslation Saved Sessions Load save or delete a stored session Selection Colours E Connection Default Settings Load Proxy Telnet Delete Rlogin SSH Kex F E Close window on exit Sej O Always O Never Only on clean exit x11 After successful authentication please enter the login user name If you log on to the switch without entering password it indicates that the key has been successfully downloaded 192 168 0 1 PuTTY login admin Further authentication required Authenticating with public key rsa key 20100120 from agent TP LINK gt Return to CONTENTS 29 Chapter 5 Switching Switching module is used to configure the basic functions of the switch including four submenus Port LAG Traffic Monitor and MAC Address 5 1 Port The Port function allowing you to configure the basic features for the port is implemented on the Port Config Port Mirror Port Security and Port Isolation pages 5 1 1 Port Config On this page you can configure the basic parameters for the ports When the port is disabled the packets on the port will be discarded Disabling the port which is vacant for a long time can reduce the power consumption effectively And you can enable the port when it is in need The parameters will affect the working mode of the port please set the parameters appropriate to your needs Choose the menu Switching Port Port Config to load the following page Port C
127. ate the Protocol Template before configuring Protocol VLAN Create Protocol VLAN Required On the VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Protocol VLAN page select the protocol type and enter the VLAN ID to create a Protocol VLAN Modify View VLAN Optional On the VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Protocol VLAN page click the Edit button to modify view the information of the corresponding VLAN Delete VLAN Optional On the VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Protocol VLAN page select the desired entry to delete the corresponding VLAN by clicking the Delete button 6 4 Application Example for 802 1Q VLAN v Network Requirements Switch A is connecting to PC A and Server B Switch B is connecting to PC B and Server A PC A and Server A is in the same VLAN PC B and Server B is in the same VLAN PCs in the two VLANs cannot communicate with each other Network Diagram Server B Server A Port 8 Switch A Port 2 Port 7 Switch B 65 gt Configuration Procedure e Configure Switch A Step Operation Description 1 Configure the Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page configure Link Type of the the link type of Port 2 Port 3 and Port 4 as ACCESS TRUNK and ports ACCESS respectively 2 Create VLAN10 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLANID as 10 owning Port 2 and Port 3 3 Create VLAN20 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN
128. ation controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first enter a user ID and password for authentication IEEE 802 3ac Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging IEEE 802 3x Defines Ethernet frame start stop requests and timers used for flow control on full duplex links Now incorporated in IEEE 802 3 2002 Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP A protocol through which hosts can register with their local router for multicast services If there is more than one multicast switch router on a given subnetwork one of the devices is made the querier and assumes responsibility for keeping track of group membership IGMP Snooping Listening to IGMP Query and IGMP Report packets transferred between IP Multicast Routers and IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast group members IGMP Query On each subnetwork one IGMP capable device will act as the querier that is the device that asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups they wish to join or to which they already belong The elected querier will be the device with the lowest IP address in the subnetwork IP Multicast Filtering It is a feature to allow or deny the Client to add the specified multicast group Multicast Switching A process whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for services forwhich no attached host has registered or forwards them to all ports contained within the designated multicast group Layer 2 249 Data Link
129. ay be set according to the port default the packet s priority bit in the VLAN tag TCP UDP port number or DSCP priority bit Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP DSCP uses a six bit tag to provide for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding The DSCP bits are mapped to the Class of Service categories and then into the output queues Domain Name Service DNS A system used for translating host names for network nodes into IP addresses Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP IP network DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol BOOTP adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration options Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL EAPOL is a client authentication protocol used by this switch to verify the network access rights for any device that is plugged into the switch A user name and password is requested by the switch and then passed to an authentication server e g RADIUS for verification EAPOL is implemented as part of the IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication standard GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP Defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register necessary VLAN members on ports along the Spanning Tree so that VLANs defined in each switch can work au
130. based on the 43 destination MAC address of the packets Address Table contains the port based MAC address information which is the base for the switch to forward packets quickly The entries in the Address Table can be updated by auto learning or configured manually Most the entries are generated and updated by auto learning In the stable networks the static MAC address entries can facilitate the switch to reduce broadcast packets and enhance the efficiency of packets forwarding remarkably The address filtering feature allows the switch to filter the undesired packets and forbid its forwarding so as to improve the network security The types and the features of the MAC Address Table are listed as the following Being kept after reboot Relationship between Type Configuration Way Aging out if the configuration is the bound MAC saved address and the port Static Manually configuring No Yes The bound MAC Address Table address can not be learned by the other ports in the same VLAN Dynamic Automatically Yes No The bound MAC Address Table learning address can be learned by the other ports in the same VLAN Filtering Manually configuring No Yes Address Table Table 5 1 Types and features of Address Table This function includes four submenus Address Table Static Address Dynamic Address and Filtering Address 5 4 1 Address Table On this page you can view all the information of the Address Tabl
131. byte 1 1024 Help Interval 1000 millisec 100 1000 Ping Result Pinging 192 168 0 1 with 64 bytes of data Reply from 192 168 0 1 bytes 64 time lt 16ms TTL 64 Reply from 192 168 0 1 bytes 64 time lt 16ms TTL 64 Reply from 192 168 0 1 bytes 64 time lt 16ms TTL 64 Reply from 192 168 0 1 bytes 64 time 16ms TTL 64 Ping statistics for 192 168 0 1 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost 0 0 loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum Orms Maximum Oms Average Oms Figure 16 9 Ping The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Ping Config Destination IP Enter the IP address of the destination node for Ping test Ping Times Enter the amount of times to send test data during Ping testing The default value is recommended Data Size Enter the size of the sending data during Ping testing The default value is recommended Interval Specify the interval to send ICMP request packets The default value is recommended 16 4 2 Tracert Tracert test function is used to test the connectivity of the gateways during its journey from the source to destination of the test data When malfunctions occur to the network you can locate trouble spot of the network with this tracert test Choose the menu Maintenance Network Diagnose gt Tracert to load the following page 229 Tracer Config Destination IP 192 168 0 100 Max Hop 4 hop 1 30 Tracert Result Figure 16 10
132. can be selected into the same aggregation group In an aggregation group the port with smaller port priority will be considered as the preferred one If the two port priorities are equal the port with smaller port number is preferred After an aggregation group is established the selected ports can be aggregated together as one port to transmit packets On this page you can configure the LACP feature of the switch Choose the menu Switching gt LAG gt LACP Config to load the following page 39 Global Config System Priority LACP Config Select Port O O 1 O 2 O 3 O 4 O 5 O 6 O 7 O 8 O g O 10 O 11 O 12 O 13 O 14 O 15 Note 32768 0 65535 Port sd Admin Key Port Priority 0 65535 Status LAG Disable v 1 32768 Disable z A 1 32768 Disable 1 32768 Disable 1 32768 Disable 1 32768 Disable 1 32768 Disable 1 32768 Disable 1 32768 Disable 1 32768 Disable 1 32768 Disable 1 1 32768 Disable 1 32768 Disable 1 32768 Disable 1 32768 Disable 1 32768 Disable E 1 To avoid any broadcast storm when LACP takes effect you are suggested to enable Spanning Tree function 2 LACP function cant be enabled for the port already in a static link aggregation group Figure 5 9 LACP Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config System Priority LACP Config Port Select Select Port Admin Key Port Priority Specify the system priority
133. ckets The multicast IP addresses range from 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 The following table displays the range and description of several special multicast IP addresses Multicast IP address range Description 224 0 0 0 224 0 0 255 Reserved multicast addresses for routing protocols and other network protocols 224 0 1 0 224 0 1 255 Addresses for video conferencing 239 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 Local management multicast addresses which are used in the local network only Table 8 1 Range of the special multicast IP 2 Multicast MAC Address When a unicast packet is transmitted in an Ethernet network the destination MAC address is the MAC address of the receiver When a multicast packet is transmitted in an Ethernet network the destination is not a receiver but a group with uncertain number of members so a multicast MAC address a logical MAC address is needed to be used as the destination address As stipulated by IANA the high order 24 bits of a multicast MAC address begins with 01 00 5E while the low order 23 bits of a multicast MAC address are the low order 23 bits of the multicast IP address The mapping relationship is described as Figure 8 2 0 7 15 23 31 IPAddress 1110 The low order 23 bits of the multicast IP are mapped to the low order 23 bits of the multicast MAC address MAC Address 00000001 00000000 ol 00 SE Figure 8 2 Mapping relationship between multicast IP address and
134. col is implemented with the premise that all the Hosts and Gateways are trusted there are high security risks during ARP Implementation Procedure in the actual complex network Thus the cheating attacks against ARP such as imitating Gateway cheating Gateway cheating terminal Hosts and ARP Flooding Attack frequently occur to the network especially to the large network such as campus network and so on The following part will simply introduce these ARP attacks gt Imitating Gateway The attacker sends the MAC address of a forged Gateway to Host and then the Host will automatically update the ARP table after receiving the ARP response packets which causes that the Host can not access the network normally The ARP Attack implemented by imitating Gateway is illustrated in the following figure IP 192 168 0 1 MAC 00 00 00 11 11 11 Gateway 3 Host tries to communicate with Gateway via the MAC Address 00 00 12 34 56 but Switch failed The normal communication is broken 1 Attacker sends the fake ARP packets with a forged Gateway address 00 00 00 12 34 56 to the normal Host 2 Host updates its ARP table The original ARP entry 192 168 0 1 00 00 00 11 11 11 is updated to 192 168 0 1 00 00 00 12 34 56 Attacker Host IP 192 168 0 102 IP 192 168 0 103 MAC 00 00 00 22 22 22 MAC 00 00 00 33 33 33 Figure 12 9 ARP Attack Imitating Gateway As the above figure shown the attacker sends the fake ARP
135. d E notification packets SNMP Management Station SNMP Agent Figure 13 1 Relationship among SNMP Network Elements gt SNMP Versions This switch supports SNMP v3 and is compatible with SNMP 1 and SNMP v2c The SNMP versions adopted by SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent should be the same Otherwise SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent can not communicate with each other normally You can select the management mode with proper security level according to your actual application requirement 175 SNMP v1 SNMP v1 adopts Community Name authentication The community name is used to define the relation between SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent The SNMP packets failing to pass community name authentication are discarded The community name can limit access to SNMP Agent from SNMP NMS functioning as a password SNMP v2c SNMP v2c also adopts community name authentication It is compatible with SNMP v1 while enlarges the function of SNMP v1 SNMP v3 Based on SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c SNMP v3 extremely enhances the security and manageability It adopts VACM View based Access Control Model and USM User Based Security Model authentication The user can configure the authentication and the encryption functions The authentication function is to limit the access of the illegal user by authenticating the senders of packets Meanwhile the encryption function is used to encrypt the packets transmitted between SNMP Management Station an
136. d SNMP Agent so as to prevent any information being stolen The multiple combinations of authentication function and encryption function can guarantee a more reliable communication between SNMP Management station and SNMP Agent gt MIB Introduction To uniquely identify the management objects of the device in SNMP messages SNMP adopts the hierarchical architecture to identify the managed objects It is like a tree and each tree node represents a managed object as shown in the following figure Thus the object can be identified with the unique path starting from the root and indicated by a string of numbers The number string is the Object Identifier of the managed object In the following figure the OID of the managed object B is 1 2 1 1 While the OID of the managed object A is 1 2 1 1 5 Figure 13 2 Architecture of the MIB tree gt SNMP Configuration Outline 1 Create View The SNMP View is created for the SNMP Management Station to manage MIB objects The managed object uniquely identified by OID can be set to under or out of the management of SNMP Management Station by configuring its view type included excluded The OID of managed object can be found on the SNMP client program running on the SNMP Management Station 2 Create SNMP Group After creating the SNMP View it s required to create a SNMP Group The Group Name Security Model and Security Level compose the identifier of the SNMP Group The Groups with these three
137. d on this parameter Device Class LLDP MED devices are comprised of two primary device types Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices In turn Endpoint Devices are composed of three defined Classes Class Class Il and Class III Bridge is a Network Connectivity Device 14 4 2 Port Config On this page you can configure all ports LLDP MED parameters 201 Choose the menu LLDP gt LLDP MED gt Port Config to load the following page LLDP MED Port Config Pot select Port LLDP MED Status Included TL s O O 1 Disable Detail n O 2 Disable Detail O 3 Disable Detail O 4 Disable Detail O 5 Disable Detail O 6 Disable Detail O 7 Disable Detail O 8 Disable Detail LJ O 9 Disable Detail O 10 Disable Detail O 11 Disable Detail O 12 Disable Detail O 13 Disable Detail O 14 Disable Detail lt Figure 14 7 LLDP MED Port Configuration The following entries are displayed on this screen gt LLDP MED Port Config Port Select Select the desired port to configure LLDP MED Status Configure the port s LLDP MED status Enable Enable the port s LLDP MED status and the port s Admin Status will be changed to TX amp Rx Disable Disable the port s LLDP MED status Included TLVs Select TLVs to be included in outgoing LLDPDU Details Click Details to display the included TLVs and select the desired TLVs 202 Included TL s Network Policy Location Identification Extended Power Via MDI Inventory Man L
138. da A a E RETA 141 NA 142 11 41 Binding Table 2 eee cies cect ccav a dis 142 14 42 Port Binding sn tia Ad eine ee art 143 MAS VEAN BINGING isa id 143 11 5 Application Example for ACL oooonoccccccnccccinononconcncnnonconcnnonnnonnnnonononnnnnonnnnnnnennanannnnnnes 144 Chapter 12 Network Security ooococcononococccnnccccinnnnconccnnococinnnnnononnnncoconcnnnnnncnnnnnnencannnnnncnnnncicinns 147 124 CIPEMAG BINGING ti eos eee ett ais dene eS ae eo 147 42 11 Binding Table ii atid ak Ae A pe agrees 147 WAZ Manual BINdINO usocrnira lia ter 148 12 13 ARP SCANNING iii AAA a 150 121 4 DHCP SNOOPING a haaa aeara at a larisa OEE EAA TAE 151 122 ARP INSPOCUOM imitar as 157 12 21 ARP Detecta A di 161 12 22 ARP Defend rnestr ern licitar seri 162 12 2 3 ARP Statistics niiair aena n e a ae teed ai 164 123 DOS Defendi mereerin A a d EEEE tl ia 164 PAI ON 166 12 4 1 CRA 170 12 4 2 Port Conf il at etl hice Se 172 124 3 Radius SV ts 173 Chapter 13 SNMP iii cel 175 13 1 SNMP GODTOG isc id tdt 177 1341 Global COMPO error pica dra ser bedhead st 177 13 1 2 SNMP ds 178 131 37 SNMP Group iii ll la rial diester Set 179 194 4 SNMP User add tdo 180 13 1 0 SNMP COMMUNI tienaan a o reaa a ea ias 182 132 Notifica A tt 184 139 RAMONA aid 186 13 31 History Controlee inicia a 187 13 32 Event Config e e einai RAGA Ra ee aaa i 187 13 3 3 gt Alarm CONi goiera i ita 188 Chapter t4 LD Pruna a a a A e o a E ea E Aine 191 141
139. ddress entries only Dynamic This option allows the address table to display the dynamic address entries only Filtering This option allows the address table to display the filtering address entries only Displays the MAC address learned by the switch 45 VLAN ID Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address Port Displays the corresponding Port number of the MAC address Type Displays the Type of the MAC address Aging Status Displays the Aging status of the MAC address 5 4 2 Static Address The static address table maintains the static address entries which can be added or removed manually independent of the aging time In the stable networks the static MAC address entries can facilitate the switch to reduce broadcast packets and remarkably enhance the efficiency of packets forwarding without learning the address The static MAC address learned by the port with Port Security enabled in the static learning mode will be displayed in the Static Address Table Choose the menu Switching gt MAC Address Static Address to load the following page Create Static Address MAC Address Format 00 00 00 00 00 01 VLAN ID 1 4094 Port Poti w Search Option Search Option All v Static Address Table Select MAC Address WLAN IB Port Type Aging Status O Poti v Total MAC Address 0 Note The maximum ofthe displayed entries is 100 by default please click the Search button to get
140. ddress without an expiration time limitation to the Clients 3 Dynamically assign the IP address DHCP Server assigns the IP address with an expiration time When the time for the IP address expired the Client should apply for a new one The most Clients obtain the IP addresses dynamically which is illustrated in the following figure 152 d 2 3 4 DHCP Client DHCP Server 1 DHCP DISCOVER 2 DHCP OFFER 3 DHCP REQUEST 4 DHCP ACK Figure 12 6 Interaction between a DHCP client and a DHCP server DHCP DISCOVER Stage The Client broadcasts the DHCP DISCOVER packet to find the DHCP Server DHCP OFFER Stage Upon receiving the DHCP DISCOVER packet the DHCP Server selects an IP address from the IP pool according to the assigning priority of the IP addresses and replies to the Client with DHCP OFFER packet carrying the IP address and other information DHCP REQUEST Stage In the situation that there are several DHCP Servers sending the DHCP OFFER packets the Client will only respond to the first received DHCP OFFER packet and broadcast the DHCP REQUEST packet which includes the assigned IP address of the DHCP OFFER packet DHCP ACK Stage Since the DHCP REQUEST packet is broadcasted all DHCP Servers on the network segment can receive it However only the requested Server processes the request If the DHCP Server acknowledges assigning this IP address to the Client it will send the DHCP ACK packet back t
141. de he ave capee ces rok Soon N ea tec a ited 225 16 23 Remote LOG coincidi cantons 225 16 24 BACKUP O ANO DE 226 10 3 Device Diagnose it A Aye AA 227 10 31 Cable Test iaa 227 A e e iee rey i e eaa e a deed e a aa e ae e e 228 16 4 NetWork DINOS mita aa e a he a aaa e Eaa AA Taa 228 IEAA PNI a ed esa the r a R 228 16 42 TRACER ii A a E cc A tes 229 Appendix A Specification S seiorn pirita r aa aa aaae Aea an aa i ai 231 Appendix B Configuring the PCS 0ooooocccocccccnococooccccococnnnonnononononcnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnennanannnnnnnnnnencanannnnnnes 232 Appendix C Load Software Using FTP c cccceceeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeesesenceieeeeeeeeseteeneaees 235 Appendix D 802 1X Client Software ooocooincccccncnncccincononcccconcnconcnnnnnnnonoconcnnonannnnncnnnncanininnennnes 240 AppendiX EClOSS AV iia A Ad 248 Package Contents The following items should be found in your box One JetStream L2 Managed PoE Switch One power cord One console cable Two mounting brackets and other fittings Installation Guide Vv Vv VV VV WV Resource CD for TL SG3424P switch including e This User Guide e Other Helpful Information aan ote Make sure that the package contains the above items If any of the listed items are damaged or missing please contact your distributor Chapter 1 About this Guide This User Guide contains information for setup and management of TL SG3424P JetStream L2 Managed PoE
142. dge ID of X equal those of Y but the port ID of X is smaller than that of Y X is superior to Y gt STP Generation 74 e Inthe beginning In the beginning each switch regards itself as the root and generates a configuration BPDU for each port on it as a root with the root path cost being 0 the ID of the designated bridge being that of the switch and the designated port being itself e Comparing BPDUs Each switch sends out configuration BPDUs and receives a configuration BPDU on one of its ports from another switch The following table shows the comparing operations Step Operation 1 If the priority of the BPDU received on the port is lower than that of the BPDU if of the port itself the switch discards the BPDU and does not change the BPDU of the port 2 If the priority of the BPDU is higher than that of the BPDU of the port itself the switch replaces the BPDU of the port with the received one and compares it with those of other ports on the switch to obtain the one with the highest priority Table 7 1 Comparing BPDUs e Selecting the root bridge The root bridge is selected by BPDU comparing The switch with the smallest root ID is chosen as the root bridge e Selecting the root port and designate port The operation is taken in the following way Step Operation 1 For each switch except the one chosen as the root bridge in a network the port that receives the BPDU with the highes
143. dicates to keep the Option 82 field of the packets e Replace Indicates to replace the Option 82 field of the packets with the switch defined one Drop Indicates to discard the packets including the Option 82 field Enable Disable the switch to define the Option 82 Enter the sub option Circuit ID for the customized Option 82 Enter the sub option Remote ID for the customized Option 82 Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select your desired port for configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number Select Enable Disable the port to be a Trusted Port Only the Trusted Port can receive the DHCP packets from DHCP servers Select Enable Disable the MAC Verify feature There are two fields of the DHCP packet containing the MAC address of the Host The MAC Verify feature is to compare the two fields and discard the packet if the two fields are different Select Enable Disable the Flow Control feature for the DHCP packets The excessive DHCP packets will be discarded Select Enable Disable the Decline Protect feature Displays the LAG to which the port belongs to 156 12 2 ARP Inspection According to the ARP Implementation Procedure stated in 12 1 3 ARP Scanning it can be found that ARP protocol can facilitate the Hosts in the same network segment to communicate with one another or access to external network via Gateway However since ARP proto
144. displayed on this screen gt Create IP Range IP Range ID Enter the IP range ID Start Multicast IP Enter start multicast IP of the IP range you set End Multicast IP Enter end multicast IP of the IP range you set gt IP Range Table IP Range ID Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding IP range ID based on the ID number you entered Select Select the desired entry to delete or modify the corresponding IP range It is multi optional IP Range ID Displays IP range ID Start Multicast IP Displays start multicast IP of the IP range End Multicast IP Displays end multicast IP of the IP range 106 8 3 2 Port Filter On this page you can configure the multicast filter rules for port Take the configuration on this page and the configuration on IP Range page together to function to implement multicast filter function on the switch Choose the menu Multicast Multicast Filter Port Filter to load the following page Port Filter Config Port Select Port Filter Action Mode Bound IP Range ID Max Groups LAG O Disable v Permit v O 1 Disable permit A O 2 Disable permit O 3 Disable permit a ue O 4 Disable permit O 5 Disable permit O 6 Disable permit E O 7 Disable permit a O 8 Disable permit O g Disable permit O 10 Disable permit En O 11 Disable permit O 12 Disable permit v Note 1 The port filter configuration here has no effect on static multicast IP
145. e Choose the menu Switching gt MAC Address Address Table to load the following page 44 Search Option C MAC Address C VLAN ID Format 00 00 00 00 00 01 1 4094 O Port O Type Address Table MAC Address 00 00 5E 00 01 02 00 04 EB 00 23 19 00 0F E2 F5 28 D7 00 19 66 35 E5 7F 00 19 66 80 53 5E 00 19 66 80 54 2B 00 19 66 80 54 36 00 19 66 80 54 44 00 19 66 82 94 37 00 19 66 82 94 4C 00 19 66 83 AB 79 00 19 66 C9 02 24 Total MAC Address 55 Note All Static Dynamic Filtering VLAN ID Port Type Aging Status 1 6 Dynamic Aging 1 6 Dynamic Aging 1 6 Dynamic Aging 1 6 Dynamic Aging 1 6 Dynamic Aging 1 8 Dynamic Aging 1 6 Dynamic Aging 1 6 Dynamic Aging 1 6 Dynamic Aging 1 6 Dynamic Aging 1 6 Dynamic Aging 1 6 Dynamic Aging ha The maximum ofthe displayed entries is 100 by default please click the Search button to get the complete address entries Figure 5 12 Address Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt gt Search Option MAC Address VLAN ID Port Type Address Table MAC Address Enter the MAC address of your desired entry Enter the VLAN ID of your desired entry Select the corresponding port number of your desired entry Select the type of your desired entry All This option allows the address table to display all the address entries Static This option allows the address table to display the static a
146. e SP WRR Mode Strict Priority Weight Round Robin Mode In this mode this switch provides two scheduling groups SP group and WRR group Queues in SP group and WRR group are scheduled strictly based on strict priority mode while the queues inside WRR group follow the WRR mode In SP WRR mode TC3 is in the SP group TCO TC1 and TC2 belong to the WRR group and the weight value ratio of TCO TC1 and TC2 is 1 2 4 In this way when scheduling queues the switch allows TC3 to occupy the whole bandwidth following the SP mode and the TCO TC1 and TC2 in the WRR group will take up the bandwidth according to their ratio 1 2 4 Equ Mode Equal Mode In this mode all the queues occupy the bandwidth equally The weight value ratio of all the queues is 1 1 1 1 112 The QoS module is mainly for traffic control and priority configuration including three submenus DiffServ Bandwidth Control and Voice VLAN 9 1 DiffServ This switch classifies the ingress packets maps the packets to different priority queues and then forwards the packets according to specified scheduling algorithms to implement QoS function This switch implements three priority modes based on port on 802 1P and on DSCP and supports four queue scheduling algorithms The port priorities are labeled as CoSO CoS1 CoS7 The DiffServ function can be implemented on Port Priority Schedule Mode 802 1P Priority and DSCP Priority pages 9 1 1 Port Priority On this page you can c
147. e corresponding View e read write Management right of the Community is read write and changes can be made to the corresponding View Select the MIB View for the community to access Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding Community It is multi optional Displays the Community Name here Displays the right of the Community to access the View Displays the Views which the Community can access Click the Edit button to modify the MIB View and the Access right of the Community and then click the Modify button to apply The default MIB View of SNMP Community is viewDefault Configuration Procedure e If SNMPv3 is employed please take the following steps Step Operation Description 1 Enable SNMP function globally Required On the SNMP gt SNMP Config Global Config page enable SNMP function globally 2 Create SNMP View Required On the SNMP gt SNMP Config gt SNMP View page create SNMP View of the management agent The default View Name is viewDefault and the default OID is 1 3 Create SNMP Group Required On the SNMP SNMP Config gt SNMP Group page create SNMP Group for SNMPv3 and specify SNMP Views with various access levels for SNMP Group 4 Create SNMP User Required On the SNMP gt SNMP Config SNMP User page create SNMP User in the Group and configure the auth privacy mode and auth privacy password for the User e If SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c is
148. e high speed logical link that combines several lower speed physical links Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS compliant devices on the network Remote Monitoring RMON RMON provides comprehensive network monitoring capabilities It eliminates the polling required in standard SNMP and can set alarms on a variety of traffic conditions including specific error types Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP RSTP reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10 of that required by the older IEEE 802 1D STP standard Secure Shell SSH A secure replacement for remote access functions including Telnet SSH can authenticate users with a cryptographic key and encrypt data connections between management clients and the 250 switch Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network management services Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a Network Time Protocol NTP server Updates can be requested from a specific NTP server or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP servers Spanning Tree Algorithm STA A technology that checks your network for any loops A loop can often occur in complicated or backup linked network systems Spann
149. e port 5 3 2 Traffic Statistics Traffic Statistics screen displ ays the detailed traffic information of each port which facilitates you to monitor the traffic and locate faults promptly Choose the menu Switching Traffic Monitor Traffic Statistics to load the following page Auto Refresh Auto Refresh O Enable Disable i Apply Refresh Rate sec 3 300 Statistics Port f 7 Received Sent Broadcast 0 Broadcast 0 Multicast 0 Multicast 0 Unicast 0 Unicast 0 Alignment Errors 0 Collisions 0 UndersizePkts 0 Pktsb4Octets 0 Pkts65to127Octets 0 Pkts128to2550Octets 0 Pkts256to511Octets 0 Pkts512to10230ctets 0 PktsOver10230ctets 0 Figure 5 11 Traffic Statistics 42 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Refresh Rate Statistics Port Received Sent Broadcast Multicast Unicast Alignment Errors UndersizePkts Pkts64Octets Pkts65to127Octets Pkts128to255Octets Pkts256to511Octets Pkts512to1023Octets PktsOver10230Octets Collisions Allows you to Enable Disable refreshing the Traffic Summary automatically Enter a value in seconds to specify the refresh interval Enter a port number and click the Select button to view the traffic statistics of the corresponding port Displays the details of the packets received on the port Displays the details of the packets transmitted on the port Displays the number of
150. e response from the management station before resending a request Retry Displays the amount of times the switch resends an inform request Operation Click the Edit button to modify the corresponding entry and click the Modify button to apply 13 3 RMON RMON Remote Monitoring based on SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol architecture functions to monitor the network RMON is currently a commonly used network management standard defined by Internet Engineering Task Force IETF which is mainly used to monitor the data traffic across a network segment or even the entire network so as to enable the network administrator to take the protection measures in time to avoid any network malfunction In addition RMON MIB records network statistics information of network performance and malfunction periodically based on which the management station can monitor network at any time effectively RMON is helpful for network administrator to manage the large scale network since it reduces the communication traffic between management station and managed agent gt RMON Group This switch supports the following four RMON Groups defined on the RMON standard RFC1757 History Group Event Group Statistic Group and Alarm Group RMON Group Function History Group After a history group is configured the switch collects and records network statistics information periodically based on which the management station can monitor network effectiv
151. e a new VLAN 54 VLAN Create VLAN ID 2 4094 Description 16 characters maximum VLAN Members Port Select Port Link Type Egress Rule LAG O 1 ACCESS UNTAG x O 2 ACCESS UNTAG dl 3 ACCESS UNTAG O 4 ACCESS UNTAG O 5 ACCESS UNTAG O 6 ACCESS UNTAG Fj 7 ACCESS UNTAG O 8 ACCESS UNTAG E dl 9 ACCESS UNTAG A 10 ACCESS UNTAG O 11 ACCESS UNTAG O 12 ACCESS UNTAG O 13 ACCESS UNTAG O 14 ACCESS UNTAG v Apply Note Link Type can be changed in Page Port Config Figure 6 4 Create or Modify 802 1Q VLAN The following entries are displayed on this screen gt VLAN Config VLAN ID Enter the ID number of VLAN Description Give a description to the VLAN for identification Check Click the Check button to check whether the VLAN ID you entered is valid or not gt VLAN Members Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding entry based on the port number you entered Select Select the desired port to be a member of VLAN or leave it blank It s multi optional Port Displays the port number Link Type Displays the Link Type of the port It can be reset on Port Config screen 55 Egress Rule Select the Egress Rule for the VLAN port member The default egress rule is UNTAG e TAG All packets forwarded by the port are tagged The packets contain VLAN information e UNTAG Packets forwarded by the port LAG Displays the
152. e control atthe same time Figure 9 11 Storm Control The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Storm Control Config Port Select Select Port Broadcast Rate bps Mulitcast Rate bps UL Framce Rate bps LAG n ote Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select the desired port for Storm Control configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number of the Switch Select the bandwidth for receiving broadcast packets on the port The packet traffic exceeding the bandwidth will be discarded Select Disable to disable the storm control function for the port Select the bandwidth for receiving multicast packets on the port The packet traffic exceeding the bandwidth will be discarded Select Disable to disable the storm control function for the port Select the bandwidth for receiving UL Frame on the port The packet traffic exceeding the bandwidth will be discarded Select Disable to disable the storm control function for the port Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to If you enable storm control feature for the ingress rate limit enabled port ingress rate limit feature will be disabled for this port 119 9 3 Voice VLAN Voice VLANs are configured specially for voice data stream By configuring Voice VLANs and adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLANs you can perform QoS related c
153. e group after the port is removed the switch will remove the whole multicast group and send IGMP leave message to the router gt IGMP Snooping Fundamentals 1 Ports Router Port Indicates the switch port directly connected to the multicast router Member Port Indicates a switch port connected to a multicast group member 2 Timers Router Port Time Within the time if the switch does not receive IGMP query message from the router port it will consider this port is not a router port any more The default value is 300 seconds Member Port Time Within the time if the switch does not receive IGMP report message from the member port it will consider this port is not a member port any more The default value is 260 seconds Leave Time Indicates the interval between the switch receiving a leave message from a host and the switch removing the host from the multicast groups The default value is 1 second The IGMP Snooping function can be implemented on Snooping Config Port Config VLAN Config and Multicast VLAN pages 8 1 1 Snooping Config To configure the IGMP Snooping on the switch please firstly configure IGMP global configuration and related parameters on this page If the multicast address of the received multicast data is not in the multicast address table the switch will broadcast the data in the VLAN When Unknown Multicast Discard feature is enabled the switch drops the received unknown multicast so as to save the bandwidth
154. e mapping table Map VLAN 101 103 and 105 to Instance 1 map VLAN 102 104 and 106 to Instance 2 5 Configure switch C as the root On Spanning Tree MSTP_ Instance lInstance bridge of Instance 1 Config page configure the priority of Instance 1 to be 4096 6 Configure switch C as the root On Spanning Tree MSTP _ Instance lInstance bridge of Instance 2 Config page configure the priority of Instance 2 to be 0 e Configure Switch D Step Operation Description 1 Configure ports On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN page configure the link type of the related ports as Trunk and add the ports to VLAN 101 and VLAN 106 The detailed instructions can be found in the section 802 1Q VLAN 2 Enable STP function On Spanning Tree gt STP Config STP Config page enable STP function and select MSTP version On Spanning Tree gt STP Config Port Config page enable MSTP function for the port 3 Configure the region name and On Spanning Tree gt MSTP Instance gt Region Config the revision of MST region page configure the region as TP LINK and keep the default revision setting 4 Configure VLAN to Instance On Spanning Tree gt MSTP Instance gt Instance mapping table of the MST region Config page configure VLAN to Instance mapping table Map VLAN 101 103 and 105 to Instance 1 map VLAN 102 104 and 106 to Instance 2 e The configuration procedure for switch E and F is the same with that for switch D gt
155. e previous VLAN ID will be cleared and mapped to the CIST Click the Clear button to clear up all VLAN IDs from the instance ID The cleared VLAN ID will be automatically mapped to the CIST gt VLAN Instance Mapping VLAN ID Instance ID n ote Enter the desired VLAN ID After modification here the new VLAN ID will be added to the corresponding instance ID and the previous VLAN ID won t be replaced Enter the corresponding instance ID In a network with both GVRP and MSTP enabled GVRP packets are forwarded along the CIST If you want to broadcast packets of a specific VLAN through GVRP please be sure to map the VLAN to the CIST when configuring the MSTP VLAN instance mapping table For detailed introduction of GVRP please refer to GVRP function page 7 3 3 Instance Port Config A port can play different roles in different spanning tree instance On this page you can configure the parameters of the ports in different instance IDs as well as view status of the ports in the specified instance Choose the menu Spanning Tree MSTP Instance gt Instance Port Config to load the following page 84 Port Config Instance ID 1 Port Select Port Priority Path Cost Port Role Port Status LAG O O 1 128 Auto a z A O 2 128 Auto ES O 3 128 Auto x O 4 128 Auto E pS O 5 128 Auto m O 6 128 Auto co m O 7 128 Auto Z O 8 128 Auto ae O 9 128 Auto z m 3 O 10 128
156. e the transmission of the Join messages a GARP port sends each Join message two times The Join Timer is used to define the interval between the two sending operations of each Join message The Join Timer ranges from 20 to 1000 centiseconds Once the Leave Timer is set the GARP port receiving a Leave message will start its Leave timer and deregister the attribute information if it does not receive a Join message again before the timer times out The Leave Timer ranges from 60 to 3000 centiseconds Displays the LAG to which the port belongs LeaveAll Timer gt 10 Leave Timer Leave Timer gt 2 Join Timer Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Set the link type for port Required On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page set the link type of the port to be TRUNK 2 Enable GVRP function Required On the VLAN gt GVRP page enable GVRP function 3 Configure the port registration mode and the timers for the parameters of ports based on actual applications Required On the VLAN gt GVRP page configure the Return to CONTENTS 72 Chapter 7 Spanning Tree STP Spanning Tree Protocol subject to IEEE 802 1D standard is to disbranch a ring network in the Data Link layer in a local network Devices running STP discover loops in the network and block ports by exchanging information in that way a ring network can be disbranched to form a tree topological ring f
157. edirect Displays the redirect added to the policy QoS Remark Displays the QoS remark added to the policy Operation Edit the information of this action 11 3 2 Policy Create On this page you can create the policy 140 Choose the menu ACL gt Policy Config Policy Create to load the following page Create Policy Policy Name Figure 11 10 Create Policy The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Policy Policy Name Enter the name of the policy 11 3 3 Action Create On this page you can add ACLs and create corresponding actions for the policy Choose the menu ACL gt Policy Config lt Action Create to load the following page Create Action Select Policy SelectACL O s Mirror Port O Condition Rate Out of Band O Redirect Destination Port O QoS Remark DSCP Local Priority Select Policy v Select ACL vw Kbps 1 1000000 Figure 11 11 Action Create The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Action Select Policy Select ACL Select the name of the policy Select the ACL for configuration in the policy 141 S Mirror Select S Mirror to mirror the data packets in the policy to the specific port S Condition Select S Condition to limit the transmission rate of the data packets in the policy e Rate Specify the forwarding rate of the data packets t
158. een gt DSCP Priority Config gt Priority Level DSCP Priority Select Enable or Disable DSCP Priority Indicates the priority determined by the DS region of IP datagram It ranges from 0 to 63 Indicates the 802 1P priority the packets with tag are mapped to The priorities are labeled as CoSO CoS7 Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Configure the mapping Required On QoS gt DiffServ DSCP Priority page relation between the DSCP enable DSCP Priority and configure the mapping priority and 802 1P priority relation between the DSCP priority and 802 1P priority 1 Configure the mapping Required On QoS gt DiffServ 802 1P Priority page relation between the 802 1P configure the mapping relation between the 802 1P priority and TC priority and TC 2 Select a schedule mode Required On QoS DiffServ gt Schedule Mode page select a schedule mode 116 9 2 Bandwidth Control Bandwidth function allowing you to control the traffic rate and broadcast flow on each port to ensure network in working order can be implemented on Rate Limit and Storm Control pages 9 2 1 Rate Limit Rate limit functions to control the ingress egress traffic rate on each port via configuring the available bandwidth of each port In this way the network bandwidth can be reasonably distributed and utilized Choose the menu QoS gt Bandwitdth Control gt Rate Limit to load
159. egin installation Click Install to begin the installation If you want to review or change any of your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard InstallShield Figure D 5 Install the Program 6 The InstallShield Wizard is installing TpSupplicant V2 0 shown as the following screen Please wait TpSupplicant 2 0 InstallShield Wizard Setup Status The InstallShield Wizard is installing TpSupplicant 2 0 Installing CA M926DD6E 7 6597 420F 8526 143B8DF8DC85 AISSetup dll InstallShield Cancel Figure D 6 Setup Status 7 On the following screen click Finish to complete the installation 242 TpSupplicant 2 0 InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed TpSupplicant V2 0 Click Finish to exit the wizard If you have not installed WinPcap 4 0 2 or the higher version please go to http www winpcap org to download the latest version of WinPcap for installation Cancel Figure D 7 InstallShield Wizard Complete Note Please pay attention to the tips on the above screen If you have not installed WinPcap 4 0 2 or the higher version on your computer the 802 1X Client Software TpSupplicant can not work It s recommended to go to http www winpcap org to download the latest version of WinPcap for installation 2 Uninstall Software If you want to remove the TpSupplicant please take
160. eive trap messages of the assigned SNMP view generated by the Switch s SNMP agent Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding group It is multi optional Displays the Group Name here Displays the Security Model of the group Displays the Security Level of the group Displays the Read View name in the entry Displays the Write View name in the entry Displays the Notify View name in the entry Click the Edit button to modify the Views in the entry and click the Modify button to apply aan ote Every Group should contain a Read View The default Read View is viewDefault 13 1 4 SNMP User The User in a SNMP Group can manage the switch via the management station software The User and its Group have the same security level and access right You can configure the SNMP User on this page Choose the menu SNMP gt SNMP Config SNMP User to load the following page 180 User Config User Name 16 characters maximum User Type Local User v Group Name Security Model vt p v Security Level Auth Mode Auth Password 16 characters maximum Privacy Mode Privacy Password 16 characters maximum User Table Security E Privacy E Select User Name User Type Group Name Model Security Level Auth Mode Mode Operation All Note The security model and security level of the user should be the same with that of its group Figure 13 6 SNMP User The following entries are d
161. ely Event Group Event Group is used to define RMON events Alarms occur when an event is detected Statistic Group Statistic Group is set to monitor the statistic of alarm variables on the specific ports Alarm Group Alarm Group is configured to monitor the specific alarm variables When the value of a monitored variable exceeds the threshold an alarm event is generated which triggers the switch to act in the set way 186 The RMON Groups can be configured on the History Control Event Config and Alarm Config pages 13 3 1 History Control On this page you can configure the History Group for RMON Choose the menu SNMP RMON gt History Control to load the following page History Control Table Select Index Port Interval sec Owner Status O Poti Disable v O 1 Port 1 1800 monitor Disable O 2 Port1 1800 monitor Disable O 3 Port 1 1800 monitor Disable O 4 Port1 1800 monitor Disable O 5 Port1 1800 monitor Disable O 6 Port1 1800 monitor Disable O 7 Port 1 1800 monitor Disable O 8 Port 1 1800 monitor Disable O g Port 1 1800 monitor Disable O 10 Port 1 1800 monitor Disable O 11 Port1 1800 monitor Disable O 12 Port1 1800 monitor Disable Apply Figure 13 9 History Control The following entries are displayed on this screen gt History Control Table Select Select the desired entry for configuration Index Displays the index number of the entry Port Specify the port from which the
162. employed please take the following steps Step Operation Description 1 Enable SNMP function globally Required On the SNMP gt SNMP Config Global Config page enable SNMP function globally 183 2 Create SNMP View Required On the SNMP gt SNMP Config SNMP View page create SNMP View of the management agent The default View Name is viewDefault and the default OID is 1 3 Create SNMP Required alternatively Community e Create SNMP Community directly directly On the SNMP SNMP Config SNMP Community page create SNMP Community based on SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c Create SNMP Group and SNMP User Configure E access level Similar to the configuration way based on for the User Create SNMP SNMPv3 you can create SNMP Group and Group and SNMP SNMP User of SNMP v1 v2c The User name User can limit access to the SNMP agent from SNMP network management station functioning as a community name The users can manage the device via the Read View Write View and Notify View defined in the SNMP Group 13 2 Notification With the Notification function enabled the switch can initiatively report to the management station about the important events that occur on the Views e g the managed device is rebooted which allows the management station to monitor and process the events in time The notification information includes the following two types Trap Trap is the i
163. encapsulation for identification In 1999 IEEE issues the IEEE 802 1Q protocol to standardize VLAN implementation defining the structure of VLAN tagged packets IEEE 802 1Q protocol defines that a 4 byte VLAN tag is encapsulated after the destination MAC address and source MAC address to show the information about VLAN As shown in the following figure a VLAN tag contains four fields including TPID Tag Protocol Identifier Priority CFl Canonical Format Indicator and VLAN ID VLAN Tag Figure 6 2 Format of VLAN Tag 1 TPID TPID is a 16 bit field indicating that this data frame is VLAN tagged By default it is 0x8100 2 Priority Priority is a 3 bit field referring to 802 1p priority Refer to section QoS amp QoS profile for details 3 CFI CFI is a 1 bit field indicating whether the MAC address is encapsulated in the standard format in different transmission media This field is not described in detail in this chapter 4 VLAN ID VLAN ID is a 12 bit field indicating the ID of the VLAN to which this packet belongs It is in the range of 0 to 4 095 Generally O and 4 095 is not used so the field is in the range of 1 to 4 094 VLAN ID identifies the VLAN to which a packet belongs When the switch receives an un VLAN tagged packet it will encapsulate a VLAN tag with the default VLAN ID of the inbound port for the packet and the packet will be assigned to the default VLAN of the inbound port for transmission
164. ent e Notify Sending trap messages to the management station e Log amp Notify Logging the event and sending trap messages to the management station Enter the name of the device or user that defined the entry Select Enable Disable the corresponding event entry On this page you can configure Statistic Group and Alarm Group for RMON Choose the menu SNMP gt RMON gt Alarm Config to load the following page 188 Alarm Table Select Index Variable Port Sample Type es Rising Event ae Falling Event Alarm Type Interval sec Owner Status O DropEvents v Absolute Y v y All z Disable 1 DropEvents Port Absolute 100 0 00 0 All 1800 monitor Disable 2 DropEvents Port Absolute 100 0 00 0 All 1800 monitor Disable 3 DropEvents Port1 Absolute 100 D 100 D All 1800 monitor Disable 4 DropEvents Port1 Absolute 100 0 100 0 All 1800 monitor Disable o 5 DropEvents Port Absolute 100 0 00 0 All 1800 monitor Disable O 6 DropEvents Port1 Absolute 100 0 100 0 All 1800 monitor Disable 7 DropEvents Port 1 Absolute 100 0 100 0 All 1800 monitor Disable 8 DropEvents Port Absolute 100 0 00 0 All 1800 monitor Disable O 9 DropEvents Port Absolute 100 D 100 0 All 1800 monitor Disable O 10 DropEvents Port1 Absolute 100 D 100 D All 1800 monitor Disable 11 DropEvents Port1 Absolute 100 0 100 0 All 1800 monitor Disable 0 12 DropEvents Port Absolute 100 0 00 0 All 1800 monitor Disable
165. ering Address Table Select MAC Address WLAN ID Port Type Aging Status al Total MAC Address 0 Note The maximum ofthe displayed entries is 100 by default please click the Search button to get the complete address entries Figure 5 15 Filtering Address 49 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Filtering Address MAC Address Enter the MAC Address to be filtered VLAN ID Enter the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address gt Search Option Search Option Select a Search Option from the pull down list and click the Search button to find your desired entry in the Filtering Address Table e MAC Enter the MAC address of your desired entry e VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID number of your desired entry gt Filtering Address Table Select Select the entry to delete the corresponding filtering address It is multi optional MAC Address Displays the filtering MAC Address VLAN ID Displays the corresponding VLAN ID Port Here the symbol __ indicates no specified port Type Displays the Type of the MAC address Aging Status Displays the Aging Status of the MAC address n ote 1 The MAC address in the Filtering Address Table can not be added to the Static Address Table or bound to a port dynamically 2 This MAC address filtering function is not available if the 802 1X feature is enabled Return to CONTENTS 50 Chapter 6 VLAN The traditional Ethernet is a data network communicat
166. erver as the trusted port to forward DHCP packets and thereby ensures that users get proper IP addresses DHCP Snooping is to monitor the process of the Host obtaining the IP address from DHCP server and record the IP address MAC address VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host for automatic binding The bound entry can cooperate with the ARP Inspection and the other security protection features DHCP Snooping feature prevents the network from the DHCP Server Cheating Attack by discarding the DHCP packets on the distrusted port so as to enhance the network security 154 Choose the menu Network Security IP MAC Binding Binding Table to load the following page DHCP Snooping Config DHCP Snooping Enable Disable Global Flow Control Disable w pps i Apply Decline Threshold Disable pps Decline Flow Control 5 v pps Option 82 Config Option 82 Support O Enable Disable Existed Option 82 field Keep v Customization Enable Disable Apply Circuit ID Remote ID Port Config Port Select Port Trusted Port MAC Verify Flow Control Decline Protect LAG O Disable v Disable v Disable w Disable v O 1 Enable Disable Disable Disable A O 2 Enable Disable Disable Disable O 3 Enable Disable Disable Disable O 4 Enable Disable Disable Disable O 5 Enable Disable Disable Disable A O 6 Enable Disable Disable
167. es which can enhance the performance of the switch Specify the start date of the holiday Specify the end date of the holiday Enter the name of the holiday Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding holiday Displays the index of the holiday Displays the name of the holiday Displays the start date of the holiday Displays the end date of the holiday Packets are classified based on match rules in order of the rules Once a rule is matched 135 The ACL Config function can be implemented on ACL Summary ACL Create MAC ACL Standard IP ACL and Extend IP ACL pages 11 2 1 ACL Summary On this page you can view the current ACLs configured in the switch Choose the menu ACL gt ACL Config ACL Summary to load the following page Search Options Selecta ACL vj ACL Type Rule Order Rule Table All Delete Help Figure 11 4 ACL Summary The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Search Option Select ACL Select the ACL you have created ACL Type Displays the type of the ACL you select Rule Order Displays the rule order of the ACL you select gt Rule Table Here you can view the information about the ACL rule you select 11 2 2 ACL Create On this page you can create ACLs Choose the menu ACL ACL Config ACL Create to load the following page Create ACL ACLID 0 99 MAC ACL 100 199 Standard IP ACL 200 299 Extend IP ACL Rule Order User Config y Figure 11 5
168. f LAN access control devices With the 802 1X protocol enabled a supplicant can access the LAN only when it passes the authentication whereas those failing to pass the authentication are denied when accessing the LAN gt Architecture of 802 1X Authentication 166 802 1X adopts a client server architecture with three entities a supplicant system an authenticator system and an authentication server system as shown in the following figure Supplicant System LAN WLAN 1 2 3 gt Authenticator System Authentication Server System Figure 12 17 Architecture of 802 1X authentication Supplicant System The supplicant system is an entity in LAN and is authenticated by the authenticator system The supplicant system is usually a common user terminal computer An 802 1X authentication is initiated when a user launches client program on the supplicant system Note that the client program must support the 802 1X authentication protocol Authenticator System The authenticator system is usually an 802 1X supported network device such as this TP LINK switch It provides the physical or logical port for the supplicant system to access the LAN and authenticates the supplicant system Authentication Server System The authentication server system is an entity that provides authentication service to the authenticator system Normally in the form of a RADIUS server Authentication Server can store user information and serve to pe
169. feature is enabled for a member port of LAG please ensure all the member ports of this LAG are set to be in the same status and registration mode The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config GVRP Allows you to Enable Disable the GVRP function Port Config Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding entry based on the port number you entered Select Select the desired port for configuration It is multi optional 71 Port Status Registration Mode LeaveAll Timer Join Timer Leave Timer LAG aan ote Displays the port number Enable Disable the GVRP feature for the port The port type should be set to TRUNK before enabling the GVRP feature Select the Registration Mode for the port e Normal In this mode a port can dynamically register deregister a VLAN and propagate the dynamic static VLAN information e Fixed In this mode a port cannot register deregister a VLAN dynamically It only propagates static VLAN information e Forbidden In this mode a port cannot register deregister VLANs It only propagates VLAN 1 information Once the LeaveAll Timer is set the port with GVRP enabled can send a LeaveAll message after the timer times out so that other GARP ports can re register all the attribute information After that the LeaveAll timer will start to begin a new cycle The LeaveAll Timer ranges from 1000 to 30000 centiseconds To guarante
170. fect only when the system time is within the week time range gt Create Time Slice Start Time Set the start time of the time slice End Time Set the end time of the time slice gt Time Slice Table Index Displays the index of the time slice Start Time Displays the start time of the time slice 134 End Time Delete Displays the end time of the time slice Click the Delete button to delete the corresponding time slice 11 1 3 Holiday Config Holiday mode is applied as a different secured access control policy from the week mode On this page you can define holidays according to your work arrangement Choose the menu ACL gt Time Range Holiday Config to load the following page Create Holiday Start Date End Date Holiday Name Holiday Table Select Index O 1 O 2 01 w 1 01 i o E n 2 Holiday Name Start Date End Date NewvYearDay 01 01 01 01 LaborDay 05 01 05 03 Al Figure 11 3 Holiday Configuration The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Holiday Start Date End Date Holiday Name Holiday Table Select Index Holiday Name Start Date End Date 11 2 ACL Config An ACL may contain a number of rules and each rule specifies a different package range Packets are matched in match order Once a rule is matched the switch processes the matched packets taking the operation specified in the rule without considering the other rul
171. for the PoE port to supply power If No limit is selected the PoE port will supply power all the time PoE Profile Select the profile you want to apply to the selected port If a PoE Profile is selected the three attributes including PoE Status PoE Priority and Power Limit are not available Power W Displays the port s real time power supply Current mA Displays the port s real time current Voltage V Displays the port s real time voltage PD Class Displays the class the linked PD Powered Device belongs to Power Status Displays the port s real time power status 10 1 2 Profile Config PoE Power over Ethernet Profile is a short cut for the configuration of the PoE port You can create some profiles to be applied to the ports In a profile the PoE status PoE priority and Power limit are configured Choose the menu PoE PoE Config Profile Profile to load the following page Create PoE Profile Profile Name WAS POE Status Enable Disable POE Priority High v Power Limit Auto v PoE Profile Select Profile Name PoE Status PoE Priority Power Limit ws O 1 Enable High Auto al Figure 10 2 Profile Config The following items are displayed on this screen gt Create PoE Profile 128 Profile Name Enter the name of the profile PoE Status Select to the enable disable PoE feature for the corresponding port If set enable the port may supply power to the linked PD Power Device PoE Priorit
172. from this bridge to the Root Bridge and forwards packets to the root 81 Designated Port Indicates the port that forwards packets to a downstream network segment or switch e Master Port Indicates the port that connects a MST region to the common root The path from the master port to the common root is the shortest path between this MST region and the common root Alternate Port Indicates the port that can be a backup port of a root or master port Backup Port Indicates the port that is the backup port of a designated port Disabled Indicates the port that is not participating in the STP Port Status Displays the working status of the port e Forwarding In this status the port can receive forward data receive send BPDU packets as well as learn MAC address Learning In this status the port can receive send BPDU packets and learn MAC address Blocking In this status the port can only receive BPDU packets Disconnected In this status the port is not participating in the STP LAG Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to aan ote 1 Configure the ports connected directly to terminals as edge ports and enable the BPDU protection function as well This not only enables these ports to transit to forwarding state rapidly but also secures your network 2 All the links of ports in a LAG can be configured as point to point links 3 When the link of a port is configured as a point to point link the sp
173. functions to configure the user name and password for users to log on to the Web management page with a certain access level so as to protect the settings of the switch from being randomly changed The User Manage function can be implemented on User Table and User Config pages 4 2 1 User Table On this page you can view the information about the current users of the switch Choose the menu System User Manage User Table to load the following page User Table User ID User Name Access Level Status 1 admin Admin Enable Figure 4 7 User Table 4 2 2 User Config On this page you can configure the access level of the user to log on to the Web management page The switch provides two access levels Guest and Admin The guest only can view the settings without the right to configure the switch the admin can configure all the functions of the switch The Web management pages contained in this guide are subject to the admin s login without any explanation Choose the menu System User Manage User Config to load the following page 17 User Info User Name Access Level User Status Guest v Enable Disable Password Confirm Password User Table Select UserID O 1 Note underdashes only User Name Status Enable Access Level Operation Admin Edit admin The User Name and Password should be less than 16 characters using digits English letters and Figure 4 8 U
174. g in bring abundant management policies TL SG3424P Managed PoE Switch is also a Power Sourcing Equipment All the Auto Negotiation RJ45 ports on the switch support Power over Ethernet function which can automatically detect and supply power with those powered devices complying with IEEE 802 3af and IEEE 802 3at TL SG3424P Switch integrates multiple functions with excellent performance and is friendly to manage which can fully meet the need of the users demanding higher networking performance 2 2 Main Features e Resiliency and Availability Link aggregation LACP increases aggregated bandwidth optimizing the transport of business critical data IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree provides high link availability in multiple VLAN environments Multicast snooping automatically prevents flooding of IP multicast traffic Root Guard protects root bridge from malicious attack or configuration mistakes e Layer 2 Switching GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol allows automatic learning and dynamic assignment of VLANs Supports 255 active VLAN groups and 4K VLAN IDs e Quality of Service Supports L2 L3 granular CoS with 4 priority queues per port Rate limiting confines the traffic flow accurately according to the preset value e Security Supports multiple industry standard user authentication methods such as 802 1x RADIUS Dynamic ARP Inspection blocks ARP packets from unauthorized hosts preventing man in the middle a
175. ge Priority The bridge priority can be set to a value in the range of 0 32768 The lower value priority has the higher priority The switch with the higher priority has more chance to be chosen as the root bridge Root Port Indicates the port that has the lowest path cost from this bridge to the Root Bridge and forwards packets to the root Designated Port Indicates the port that forwards packets to a downstream network segment or switch Port Priority The port priority can be set to a value in the range of 0 255 The lower value priority has the higher priority The port with the higher priority has more chance to be chosen as the root port Path Cost Indicates the parameter for choosing the link path by STP By calculating the path cost STP chooses the better links and blocks the redundant links so as to disbranch the ring network to form a tree topological ring free network The following network diagram shows the sketch map of spanning tree Switch A B and C are connected together in order After STP generation switch A is chosen as root bridge the path from port 2 to port 6 is blocked e Bridge Switch A is the root bridge in the whole network switch B is the designated bridge of switch C e Port Port 3 is the root port of switch B and port 5 is the root port of switch C port 1 is the designated port of switch A and port 4 is the designated port of switch B port 6 is the blocked 73 port of switch C Switch B Switc
176. h C Figure 7 1 Basic STP diagram gt STP Timers Hello Time Hello Time ranges from 1 to 10 seconds It specifies the interval to send BPDU packets It is used to test the links Max Age Max Age ranges from 6 to 40 seconds It specifies the maximum time the switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure Forward Delay Forward Delay ranges from 4 to 30 seconds It specifies the time for the port to transit its state after the network topology is changed When the STP regeneration caused by network malfunction occurs the STP structure will get some corresponding change However as the new configuration BPDUs cannot be spread in the whole network at once the temporal loop will occur if the port transits its state immediately Therefore STP adopts a state transit mechanism that is the new root port and the designated port begins to forward data after twice forward delay which ensures the new configuration BPDUs are spread in the whole network gt BPDU Comparing Principle in STP mode Assuming two BPDUs BPDU X and BPDU Y If the root bridge ID of X is smaller than that of Y X is superior to Y If the root bridge ID of X equals that of Y but the root path cost of X is smaller than that of Y X is superior to Y If the root bridge ID and the root path cost of X equal those of Y but the bridge ID of X is smaller than that of Y X is superior to Y If the root bridge ID the root path cost and bri
177. h a switch Host A IP address is 192 168 0 101 MAC address is 00 00 00 11 11 11 Host B IP address is 192 168 0 102 MAC address is 00 00 00 22 22 22 Attacker IP address is 192 168 0 103 MAC address is 00 00 00 33 33 33 1 First the attacker sends the false ARP response packets 2 Upon receiving the ARP response packets Host A and Host B updates the ARP table of their own 3 When Host A communicates with Host B it will send the packets to the false destination MAC address i e to the attacker according to the updated ARP table 4 After receiving the communication packets between Host A and Host B the attacker processes and forwards the packets to the correct destination MAC address which makes Host A and Host B keep a normal appearing communication 5 The attacker continuously sends the false ARP packets to the Host A and Host B so as to make the Hosts always maintain the wrong ARP table In the view of Host A and Host B their packets are directly sent to each other But in fact there is a Man In The Middle stolen the packets information during the communication procedure This kind of ARP attack is called Man In The Middle attack gt ARP Flooding Attack The attacker broadcasts a mass of various fake ARP packets in a network segment to occupy the network bandwidth viciously which results in a dramatic slowdown of network speed Meantime the Gateway learns the false IP address to MAC address mapping entries from these ARP p
178. he switch Here mainly introduces e STP Config Configure and view the global settings of spanning tree function e Port Config Configure CIST parameters of ports e MSTP Instance Configure MSTP instances e STP Security Configure protection function to prevent devices from any malicious attack against STP features Chapter 8 Multicast This module is used to configure multicast function of the switch Here mainly introduces e IGMP Snooping Configure global parameters of IGMP Snooping function port properties VLAN and multicast VLAN e Multicast IP Configure multicast IP table e Multicast Filter Configure multicast filter feature to restrict users ordering multicast programs e Packet Statistics View the multicast data traffic on each port of the switch which facilitates you to monitor the IGMP messages in the network Chapter Introduction Chapter 9 QoS This module is used to configure QoS function to provide different quality of service for various network applications and requirements Here mainly introduces e DiffServ Configure priorities port priority 802 1P priority and DSCP priority e Bandwidth Control Configure rate limit feature to control the traffic rate on each port configure storm control feature to filter broadcast multicast and UL frame in the network e Voice VLAN Configure voice VLAN to transmit voice data stream within the specified VLAN so as to ensure the
179. he Internet during the working time but can visit the forum all day 3 The staff of the marketing department can access to the Internet all day but can not visit the forum during the working time 144 4 The R amp D department and marketing department can not communicate with each other gt Network Diagram Switch P3 P2 P4 R amp D Department 172 31 70 0 Forum Server Marketing Department Manager 00 64 A5 5D 12 C3 172 31 88 5 172 31 50 0 00 64 A5 32 4C 12 gt Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Configure On ACL gt Time Range page create a time range named work_time Time range Select Week mode and configure the week time from Monday to Friday Add a time slice 08 00 18 00 2 Configure for On ACL ACL Config ACL Create page create ACL 11 the time range as No Limit manager manager to bind to port 3 145 requirement 1 On ACL gt ACL Config MAC ACL page select ACL 11 create Rule 1 configure the operation as Permit configure the S MAC as 00 45 A5 5D 12 C3 and mask as FF FF FF FF FF FF and configure On ACL gt Policy Config Policy Create page create a policy named On ACL gt Policy Config Action Create page add ACL 11 to Policy On ACL gt Policy Binding Port Binding page select Policy manager Configure requirement and 4 for 2 On ACL gt ACL Config ACL Create page create ACL 100 On ACL ACL Config Standard IP A
180. he switches Preparation play in spanning tree instances root bridge or designated bridge 2 Globally configure MSTP Required Enable Spanning Tree function on the switch parameters and configure MSTP parameters on Spanning Tree gt STP Config STP Config page 3 Configure MSTP parameters Required Configure MSTP parameters for ports on for ports Spanning Tree Port Config Port Config page 4 Configure the MST region Required Create MST region and configure the role the switch plays in the MST region on Spanning Tree MSTP Instance gt Region Config and Instance Config page 5 Configure MSTP parameters Optional Configure different instances in the MST region for instance ports and configure MSTP parameters for instance ports on Spanning Tree gt MSTP Instance lInstance Port Config page 7 4 STP Security Configuring protection function for devices can prevent devices from any malicious attack against STP features The STP Security function can be implemented on Port Protect and TC Protect pages Port Protect function is to prevent the devices from any malicious attack against STP features 7 4 1 Port Protect On this page you can configure loop protect feature root protect feature TC protect feature BPDU protect feature and BPDU filter feature for ports You are suggested to enable corresponding protection feature for the qualified ports gt Loop Protect In a stable network a switch maintains the states of p
181. he switches and wastes network resources The default value is recommended A too small max age parameter may result in the switches regenerating spanning trees frequently and cause network congestions to be falsely regarded as link problems A too large max age parameter result in the switches unable to find the link problems in time which in turn handicaps spanning trees being regenerated in time and makes the network less adaptive The default value is recommended 79 4 Ifthe TxHold Count parameter is too large the number of MSTP packets being sent in each hello time may be increased with occupying too much network resources The default value is recommended 7 1 2 STP Summary On this page you can view the related parameters for Spanning Tree function Choose the menu Spanning Tree STP Config STP Summary to load the following page STP Summary STP Status STP Version Local Bridge Root Bridge External Path Cost Region Root Internal Path Cast Designated Bridge Root Port Latest TC Time TC Count MSTP Instance Summary Instance ID Instance Status Local Bridge Region Root Internal Path Cost Designated Bridge Root Port Latest TC Time TC Count 7 2 Port Config Disable MSTP 327 68 00 02 03 cO 9a d3 32768 00 02 03 c0 9a d3 0 32768 00 02 03 c0 9a d3 0 327 68 00 02 03 cO 9a d3 2006 01 01 10 43 30 1 1 y Disable 32768 00 02 03 c0 9a d3 32768 00 02 03 c0 9a d3 0 32768 00
182. hentication server Enter the IP address of the alternate authentication server Set the UDP port of authentication server s The default port is 1812 Set the shared password for the switch and the authentication servers to exchange messages Enable Disable the accounting feature Enter the IP address of the accounting server Enter the IP address of the alternate accounting server Set the UDP port of accounting server s The default port is 1813 Set the shared password for the switch and the accounting servers to exchange messages 1 The 802 1X function takes effect only when it is enabled globally on the switch and for the port 2 The 802 1X function can not be enabled for LAG member ports That is the port with 802 1X function enabled can not be added to the LAG 3 The 802 1X function should not be enabled for the port connected to the authentication server In addition the authentication parameters of the switch and the authentication server should be the same Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Connect an authentication server to the switch and do some configuration Required Record the information of the client in the LAN to the authentication server and configure the corresponding authentication username and password for the client 2 Install software the 802 1X client Required For the client computers you are required to install the 802 1X software TpSupplicant
183. history samples were taken Interval Specify the interval to take samplings from the port Owner Enter the name of the device or user that defined the entry Status Select Enable Disable the corresponding sampling entry 13 3 2 Event Config On this page you can configure the RMON events Choose the menu SNMP RMON gt Event Config to load the following page 187 Event Table Select Index O O 1 O 2 O 3 O 4 O 5 O 6 O 7 O 8 O 9 O 10 O 11 O 12 ser escription ype ner atus U D ipti Ih O Stat None i Disable v public None monitor Disable public None monitor Disable public None monitor Disable public None monitor Disable public None monitor Disable public None monitor Disable public None monitor Disable public None monitor Disable public None monitor Disable public None monitor Disable public None monitor Disable public None monitor Disable Figure 13 10 Event Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Event Table Select Index User Description Type Owner Status 13 3 3 Alarm Config Select the desired entry for configuration Displays the index number of the entry Enter the name of the User or the community to which the event belongs Give a description to the event for identification Select the event type which determines the act way of the network device in response to an event e None No processing e Log Logging the ev
184. hose match the corresponding ACL e Out of Band Specify the disposal way of the data packets those are transmitted beyond the rate Redirect Select Redirect to change the forwarding direction of the data packets in the policy Destination Port Forward the data packets those match the corresponding ACL to the specific port QoS Remark Select QoS Remark to forward the data packets based on the QoS settings DSCP Specify the DSCP region for the data packets those match the corresponding ACL Local Priority Specify the local priority for the data packets those match the corresponding ACL 11 4 Policy Binding Policy Binding function can have the policy take its effect on a specific port VLAN The policy will take effect only when it is bound to a port VLAN In the same way the port VLAN will receive the data packets and process them based on the policy only when the policy is bound to the port VLAN The Policy Binding can be implemented on Binding Table Port Binding and VLAN Binding pages 11 4 1 Binding Table On this page view the policy bound to port VLAN Choose the menu ACL gt Policy Binding Binding Table to load the following page Search Options Show Mode Show All Policy Bind Table Select Index Policy Name Interface Direction m Figure 11 12 Binding Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Search Option Show Mode Select a show mode appropriate to your needs
185. icast groups appropriate to their needs The switch forwards multicast streams based on multicast address table The Multicast IP can be implemented on Multicast IP Table Static Multicast IP page 103 8 2 1 Multicast IP Table On this page you can view the multicast IP table on the switch Choose the menu Multicast Multicast IP Multicast IP Table to load the following page Search Option O Multicast IP O VLAN ID O Port O Type Multicast IP Table Multicast IP Total Multicast IP 0 Format 225 0 0 1 1 4094 Static Dynamic LAN IB Forward Port Type Figure 8 8 Multicast IP Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Search Option Multicast IP VLAN ID Port Type gt Multicast IP Table Multicast IP VLAN ID Forward Port Type an ote Enter the multicast IP address the desired entry must carry Enter the VLAN ID the desired entry must carry Select the port number the desired entry must carry Select the type the desired entry must carry All Displays all multicast IP entries e Static Displays all static multicast IP entries Dynamic Displays all dynamic multicast IP entries Displays multicast IP address Displays the VLAN ID of the multicast group Displays the forward port of the multicast group Displays the type of the multicast IP If the configuration on VLAN Config page and multicast VLAN page is changed the switch will
186. ide action Max Frame Size TLV The Maximum Frame Size TLV indicates the maximum frame size capability of the implemented MAC and PHY Power Via MDI TLV The Power Via MDI TLV allows network management to advertise and discover the MDI power support capabilities of the sending IEEE 802 3 LAN station The LLDP module is mainly for LLDP function configuration of the switch including three submenus Basic Config Device Info Device Statistics and LLDP MED 194 14 1 Basic Config LLDP is configured on the Global Config and Port Config pages 14 1 1 Global Config On this page you can configure the LLDP parameters of the device globally Choose the menu LLDP Basic Config Global Config to load the following page Global Config LLDP Enable Disable Apply Parameters Config Transmit Interval Hold Multiplier Transmit Delay Reinit Delay Notification Interval Fast Start Count sec 5 32768 2 10 sec 1 8192 sec 1 10 sec 5 3600 1 10 Figure 14 1 LLDP Global Configuration The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config LLDP Enable disable LLDP function globally gt Parameters Config Transmit Interval Hold Multiplier Transmit Delay Reinit Delay Notification Interval Enter the interval for the local device to transmit LLDPDU to its neighbors The default value is 30 Enter a multiplier on the Transmit Interval It
187. ier OID for the entry of View Select the type for the view entry e Include The view entry can be managed by the SNMP management station e Exclude The view entry can not be managed by the SNMP management station Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding view All the entries of a View will be deleted together Displays the name of the View entry Displays the type of the View entry Displays the OID of the View entry 178 13 1 3 SNMP Group On this page you can configure SNMP Group to control the network access by providing the users in various groups with different management rights via the Read View Write View and Notify View Choose the menu SN Group Config Group Name Security Model Security Level Read View Write View Notify View Group Table Select Group Name Note m viewDefault v MP SNMP Config SNMP Group to load the following page 16 characters maximum vi ov None y None v Security Security Level Model Write View Read View Notify View Operation All A group should contain a read view and the default read view is viewDefault Figure 13 5 SNMP Group The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Group Config Group Name Security Model Security Level Read View Enter the SNMP Group name The Group Name Security Model and Security Level compose the identifier of the SNMP Group The Groups with these three i
188. ifferentiating the time ranges The ACL module is mainly for ACL configuration of the switch including four submenus Time Range ACL Config Policy Config and Policy Binding 11 1 Time Range If a configured ACL is needed to be effective in a specified time range a time range should be firstly specified in the ACL As the time range based ACL takes effect only within the specified time range data packets can be filtered by differentiating the time ranges On this switch absolute time week time and holiday can be configured Configure an absolute time section in the form of the start date to the end date to make ACLs effective configure a week time section to make ACLs effective on the fixed days of the week configure a holiday section to make ACLs effective on some special days In each time range four time slices can be configured The Time Range configuration can be implemented on Time Range Summary Time Range Create and Holiday Config pages 11 1 1 Time Range Summary On this page you can view the current time ranges Choose the menu ACL gt Time Range gt Time Range Summary to load the following page Time Range Table Select Index Time Range Name Slice 1 Slice 2 Slice 3 Slice 4 Mode Operation O 1 11 08 30 18 00 Week Edit Detail Al Figure 11 1 Time Range Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Time Range Table Select Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding time
189. ing Tree detects and directs data along the shortest available path maximizing the performance and efficiency of the network Telnet Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP Protocol suite that includes TCP as the primary transport protocol and IP as the network layer protocol Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP A TCP IP protocol commonly used for software downloads User Datagram Protocol UDP UDP provides a datagram mode for packet switched communications It uses IP as the underlying transport mechanism to provide access to IP like services UDP packets are delivered just like IP packets connection less datagrams that may be discarded before reaching their targets UDP is useful when TCP would be too complex too slow or just unnecessary Virtual LAN VLAN A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network A VLAN serves as a logical workgroup with no physical barriers and allows users to share information and resources as though located on the same LAN Return to CONTENTS 251
190. ing entries are displayed on this screen Description Siemens Phone Cisco Phone Avaya Phone Philips Phone Pingtel Phone PolyCom Phone 3Com Phone gt Create OUI OUI Mask Description gt OUl Table Select OUI Mask Description Enter the OUI address of the voice device Enter the OUI address mask of the voice device Give a description to the OUI for identification Select the desired entry to view the detailed information Displays the OUI address of the voice device Displays the OUI address mask of the voice device Displays the description of the OUI 124 Configuration Procedure of Voice VLAN Step Operation Description 1 Configure the Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page configure the link type of the link type of ports of the voice device port 2 Create VLAN Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page click the Create button to create a VLAN 3 Add OUI Optional On QoS Voice VLAN gt 0Ul Config page you can check address whether the switch is supporting the OUI template or not If not please add the OUI address 4 Configure the Required On QoS Voice VLAN gt Port Config page configure the parameters of parameters of the ports in voice VLAN the ports in voice VLAN 5 Enable Voice Required On QoS Voice VLAN gt Global Config page configure the VLAN global parameters of voice VLAN Return to CONTENTS 125 Chapter
191. ion is implemented on the Log Table Local Log Remote Log and Backup Log pages 16 2 1 Log Table The switch supports logs output to two directions namely log buffer and log file The information in log buffer will be lost after the switch is rebooted or powered off whereas the information in log file will be kept effective even the switch is rebooted or powered off Log Table displays the system log information in log buffer Choose the menu Maintenance gt Log gt Log Table to load the following page Log Info Index Time N KNN NH NH NH nn nh on One Q0 py Note 006 01 006 01 006 01 006 01 006 01 006 01 006 01 006 01 01 08 00 04 01 08 00 00 01 08 00 00 01 08 00 00 01 08 00 00 01 08 00 00 01 08 00 00 01 08 00 00 Module Severity Content All Module AI Level v SNMP level_5 SNMP initialization OK Binding level_5 DHCP Snooping initialization OK Binding level_5 DHCP Snooping message register OK Binding level_5 ARP Scanning initialization OK Binding level_5 ARP Scanning message resister OK LACP level_5 LACP register OK GVRP level_5 GVRP module initialization OK QoS level_5 QoS module initialization OK 1 There are 8 severity levels marked with value 0 7 The smaller value has the higher priority 2 This page displays logs in the log buffer and at most 512 logs are displayed Figure 16 3 Log Table The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Log Info Inde
192. ion technology based on CSMA CD Carrier Sense Multiple Access Collision Detect via shared communication medium Through the traditional Ethernet the overfull hosts in LAN will result in serious collision flooding broadcasts poor performance or even breakdown of the Internet Though connecting the LANs through switches can avoid the serious collision the flooding broadcasts can not be prevented which will occupy plenty of bandwidth resources causing potential serious security problems A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout The VLAN technology is developed for switches to control broadcast in LANs By creating VLANs in a physical LAN you can divide the LAN into multiple logical LANs each of which has a broadcast domain of its own Hosts in the same VLAN communicate with one another as if they are in a LAN However hosts in different VLANs cannot communicate with one another directly Therefore broadcast packets are limited in a VLAN Hosts in the same VLAN communicate with one another via Ethernet whereas hosts in different VLANs communicate with one another through the Internet devices such as Router the Lay3 Switch and etc The following figure illustrates a VLAN implementation VLAN 2 Router VLAN 6 Figure 6 1 VLAN implementation Compared with the traditional Ethernet VLAN enjoys the following advantages 1 Broadcasts are confined
193. is effective you can log on to the Web management page via https 192 168 0 1 For the first time you use HTTPS connection to log into the switch with the default certificate you will be prompted that The security certificate presented by this website was not issued by a trusted certificate authority or Certificate Errors Please add this certificate to trusted certificates or continue to this website On this page you can configure the SSL function Choose the menu System Access Security SSL Config to load the following page 23 Global Config SSL O Enable O Disable Certificate Download Certificate File Browse Key Download Key File Browse Note 1 The SSL certificate and key downloaded will not take effect until the switch is rebooted 2 The SSL certificate and key downloaded must match each other otherwise the HTTPS connection will not work Figure 4 15 SSL Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config SSL Select Enable Disable the SSL function on the switch gt Certificate Download Certificate File Select the desired certificate to download to the switch The certificate must be BASE64 encoded gt Key Download Key File Select the desired SSL Key to download to the switch The key must be BASE64 encoded Mnote 1 The SSL certificate and key downloaded must match each other otherwise the HTTPS connection will not work The SSL
194. is status the port is not participating in the STP Port Roles In an MSTP the following roles exist Root Port Indicates the port that has the lowest path cost from this bridge to the Root Bridge and forwards packets to the root Designated Port Indicates the port that forwards packets to a downstream network segment or switch Master Port Indicates the port that connects a MST region to the common root The path from the master port to the common root is the shortest path between this MST region and the common root Alternate Port Indicates the port that can be a backup port of a root or master port Backup Port Indicates the port that is the backup port of a designated port Disabled Indicates the port that is not participating in the STP The following diagram shows the different port roles 77 Connect to the root bridge Region edge port port 1 2 Master port port 1 Alternate port port 2 Designated port port 3 5 Backup port port 6 MST Region Figure 7 3 Port roles The Spanning Tree module is mainly for spanning tree configuration of the switch including four submenus STP Config Port Config MSTP Instance and STP Security 7 1 STP Config The STP Config function for global configuration of spanning trees on the switch can be implemented on STP Config and STP Summary pages 7 1 1 STP Config Before configuring spanning trees you should make clear the roles each switch plays in each spanning
195. isplayed on this screen gt Config Backup Backup Config Click the Backup Config button to save the current configuration as a file to your computer You are suggested to take this measure before upgrading n ote It will take a few minutes to backup the configuration Please wait without any operation 4 3 3 Firmware Upgrade The switch system can be upgraded via the Web management page To upgrade the system is to get more functions and better performance Go to http www tp link com to download the updated firmware Choose the menu System System Tools Firmware Upgrade to load the following page Firmware Upgrade You will get the new function after upgrading the firmware Firmware File Browse Upgrade Firmware Version 0 3 3 Build 20111215 Rel 39908 Hardware Version TL SG3424P 1 0 Note 1 Please selectthe proper software version matching with your hardware to upgrade 2 To avoid damage please dontturn off the device while upgrading 3 After upgrading the device will reboot automatically 4 You are suggested to backup the configuration before upgrading Figure 4 11 Firmware Upgrade n ote 1 Don t interrupt the upgrade 2 Please select the proper software version matching with your hardware to upgrade 20 3 To avoid damage please don t turn off the device while upgrading 4 After upgrading the device will reboot automatically 5 You are suggested to backup the configura
196. isplayed on this screen gt User Config User Name Enter the User Name here User Type Select the type for the User e Local User Indicates that the user is connected to a local SNMP engine e Remote User Indicates that the user is connected to a remote SNMP engine Group Name Select the Group Name of the User The User is classified to the corresponding Group according to its Group Name Security Model and Security Level Security Model Select the Security Model for the User Security Level Select the Security Level for the SNMP v3 User Auth Mode Select the Authentication Mode for the SNMP v3 User e None No authentication method is used e MD5 The port authentication is performed via HMAC MDS5 algorithm e SHA The port authentication is performed via SHA Secure Hash Algorithm This authentication mode has a higher security than MD5 mode Auth Password Enter the password for authentication Privacy Mode Select the Privacy Mode for the SNMP v3 User e None No privacy method is used e DES DES encryption method is used Privacy Password Enter the Privacy Password 181 gt User Table Select User Name User Type Group Name Security Model Security Level Auth Mode Privacy Mode Operation n ote Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding User It is multi optional Displays the name of the User Displays the User Type Displays the Group Name of the User Displa
197. isplays the number of neighbors inserted till last update time Total Deletes Displays the number of neighbors deleted by local device 199 Total Drops Total Ageouts Neighbor Statistics Port Select Port Transmit Total Receive Total Displays the number of neighbors dropped by local device Displays the number of overtime neighbors in local device Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Displays local device s port number Displays the number of LLDPDUs sent by this port Displays the number of LLDPDUs received by this port Discards Displays the number of LLDPDUs discarded by this port Errors Displays the number of error LLDPDUs received by this port Ageouts Displays the number of overtime neighbors linking to this port TLV Discards Displays the number of TLVs dropped by this port TLV Unknowns Displays the number of unknown TLVs received by this port 14 4 LLDP MED LLDP MED is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches The LLDP MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy power via MDI inventory management and device location details gt Elements LLDP MED Device Refers to any device which implements this Standard LLDP MED Device Type LLDP MED devices are comprised of two primary device types Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices Network Connecti
198. it will consider this port is not a router port any more Specify the aging time of the member port Within this time if the switch doesn t receive IGMP report message from the member port it will consider this port is not a member port any more Specify the interval between the switch receiving a leave message from a host and the switch removing the host from the multicast groups Select the static router port which is mainly used in the network with stable topology The router port should be in the multicast VLAN otherwise the member ports can not receive multicast streams The Multicast VLAN won t take effect unless you first complete the configuration for the corresponding VLAN owning the port on the 802 1Q VLAN page The link type of the member ports in the multicast VLAN can only be GENERAL Configure the link type of the router port in the multicast VLAN as TRUNK or configure the egress rule as TAG and the link type as GENERAL otherwise all the member ports in the multicast VLAN can not receive multicast streams After a multicast VLAN is created all the IGMP packets will be processed only within the multicast VLAN 101 Configuration procedure Step Operation Description 1 Enable IGMP Snooping Required Enable IGMP Snooping globally on the switch function and for the port on Multicast IGMP Snooping Snooping Config and Port Config page 2 Create a multicast VLAN Required Create a multicast VLAN
199. items the same are considered to be the same You can configure SNMP Group to control the network access by providing the users in various groups with different management rights via the Read View Write View and Notify View 3 Create SNMP User The User is configured in a SNMP Group can manage the switch via the client program on 176 management station The specified User Name and the Auth Privacy Password are used for SNMP Management Station to access the SNMP Agent functioning as the password SNMP module is used to configure the SNMP function of the switch including three submenus SNMP Config Notification and RMON 13 1 SNMP Config The SNMP Config can be implemented on the Global Config SNMP View SNMP Group SNMP User and SNMP Community pages 13 1 1 Global Config To enable SNMP function please configure the SNMP function globally on this page Choose the menu SNMP gt SNMP Config Global Config to load the following page Global Config SNMP Local Engine Local Engine ID Remote Engine Remote Engine ID Note Enable Disable Apply Default ID 80002e5703000aeb001301 10 64 Hex Apply Apply 0 or 10 64 Hex Help The total hexadecimal characters of Engine ID should be even Figure 13 3 Global Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config SNMP gt Local Engine Local Engine ID gt Remote Engine Remote Engine ID
200. ith Host A in LAN it will encapsulate this false destination MAC address for packets which results in a breakdown of the normal communication gt Cheating Terminal Hosts The attacker sends the false IP address to MAC address mapping entries of terminal Host Server to another terminal Host which causes that the two terminal Hosts in the same network segment can not communicate with each other normally The ARP Attack implemented by cheating terminal Hosts is illustrated in the following figure 158 IP 192 168 0 1 MAC 00 00 00 1 1 11 11 Gateway 3 Host B tries to communicate with Host A via the MAC address 00 00 00 12 34 56 but failed The normal communication is broken 1 Attacker sends the fake ARP packets of Host A with a forged MAC address 00 00 00 12 34 56 to Host B Attacker Host B Host A IP 192 168 0 102 IP 192 168 0 101 IP 192 168 0 103 MAC 00 00 00 22 22 22 MAC 00 00 00 44 44 44 MAC 00 00 00 33 33 33 2 Host B updates its ARP table The original ARP entry of Host A 192 168 0 103 00 00 00 33 33 33 is updated to 192 168 0 103 00 00 00 12 34 56 Figure 12 11 ARP Attack Cheating Terminal Hosts As the above figure shown the attacker sends the fake ARP packets of Host A to Host B and then Host B will automatically update its ARP table after receiving the ARP packets When Host B tries to communicate with Host A it will encapsulate this false destination MAC address for packets
201. itor Run Time 56sec 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 Current Utilization MAX Utilization MIN Utilization Average Utilization 17 23 16 19 Figure 16 1 CPU Monitor Click the Monitor button to enable the switch to monitor and display its CPU utilization rate every four seconds 16 1 2 Memory Monitor Choose the menu Maintenance System Monitor Memory Monitor to load the following page 222 Memory Monitor Run Time 96sec 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 Current Utilization MAX Utilization MIN Utilization Average Utilization 81 81 81 81 Figure 16 2 Memory Monitor Click the Monitor button to enable the switch to monitor and display its Memory utilization rate every four seconds 16 2 Log The Log system of switch can record classify and manage the system information effectively providing powerful support for network administrator to monitor network operation and diagnose malfunction The Logs of switch are classified into the following eight levels Severity Level Description emergencies 0 The system is unusable alerts 1 Action must be taken immediately critical 2 Critical conditions errors 3 Error conditions warnings 4 Warnings conditions notifications 5 Normal but significant conditions informational 6 Informational messages debugging 7 Debug level messages Table 16 1 Log Level 223 The Log funct
202. kets compete for resources must be solved usually in the way of queue scheduling The switch supports four schedule modes SP WRR SP WRR and Equ gt Priority Mode This switch implements three priority modes based on port on 802 1P and on DSCP By default the priority mode based on port is enabled and the other two modes are optional 1 Port Priority Port priority is just a property of the port After port priority is configured the data stream will be mapped to the egress queues according to the CoS of the port and the mapping relationship between CoS and queues 2 802 1P Priority 110 TAG 4 bytes Ethernet Frame 3bit for CoS 802 1p priority PRI CFI VLAN ID 802 1 Q p Tag Figure 9 2 802 1Q frame As shown in the figure above each 802 1Q Tag has a Pri field comprising 3 bits The 3 bit priority field is 802 1p priority in the range of O to 7 802 1P priority determines the priority of the packets based on the Pri value On the Web management page of the switch you can configure different priority tags mapping to the corresponding priority levels and then the switch determine which packet is sent preferentially when forwarding packets The switch processes untagged packets based on the default priority mode 3 DSCP Priority IPv4 datagram IEA o Unused IPv4 Standard SESE DiffServ Code Point DSCP 7 Flow Ctrl DS Region Figure 9 3 IP datagram As shown in the figure above the ToS Type of Se
203. last added or edited one will take effect You can manually bind the IP address MAC address VLAN ID and the Port number together in the condition that you have got the related information of the Hosts in the LAN Choose the menu Network Security IP MAC Binding Manual Binding to load the following page 148 Manual Binding Option Host Name 20 characters maximum IP Address Format 192 168 0 1 MAC Address Format 00 00 00 00 00 01 Cana VLAN ID 1 4094 Port 1 5 Protect Type Disable E Manual Binding Table Select Host Name IP Address MAC Address VLANID Port Protect Type Collision All Delete Help Entry Count 0 Note 1 Among the entries with critical collision level the one having the highest Source priority will take effect 2 Among the entries with the same Source priority only the last added or edited one will take effect Figure 12 2 Manual Binding The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Manual Binding Option Host Name Enter the Host Name IP Address Enter the IP Address of the Host MAC Address Enter the MAC Address of the Host VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID Port Select the number of port connected to the Host Protect Type Select the Protect Type for the entry gt Manual Binding Table Select Select the desired entry to be deleted It is multi optional Host Name Displays the Host Name here IP Address Displays the IP Address of the Host MAC Address
204. layer in the ISO 7 Layer Data Communications Protocol This is related directly to the hardware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on MAC addresses Link Aggregation See Port Trunk Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Allows ports to automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP configured ports on another device Management Information Base MIB An acronym for Management Information Base It is a set of database objects that contains information about a specific device MD5 Message Digest Algorithm An algorithm that is used to create digital signatures It is intended for use with 32 bit machines and is safer than the MD4 algorithm which has been broken MD5 is a one way hash function meaning that it takes a message and converts it into a fixed string of digits also called a message digest Network Time Protocol NTP NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network The time servers operate in a hierarchical master slave configuration in order to synchronize local clocks within the subnet and to national time standards via wire or radio Port Authentication See IEEE 802 1X Port Mirroring A method whereby data on a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for troubleshooting with a logic analyzer or RMON probe This allows data on the target port to be studied unobstructively Port Trunk Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies how to create a singl
205. le F Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable J Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable lt Figure 7 10 Port Protect The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Protect Port Select Select Port Loop Protect Root Protect TC Protect BPDU Protect BPDU Filter LAG Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select the desired port for port protect configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number of the switch Loop Protect is to prevent the loops in the network brought by recalculating STP because of link failures and network congestions Root Protect is to prevent wrong network topology change caused by the role change of the current legal root bridge TC Protect is to prevent the decrease of the performance and stability of the switch brought by continuously removing MAC address entries upon receiving TC BPDUs in the STP network BPDU Protect is to prevent the edge port from being attacked by maliciously created BPDUs BPDU Filter is to prevent BPDUs flood in the STP network Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to 88 7 4 2 TC Protect When TC
206. lect the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Displays the local port number connecting to the neighbor device Displays the system name of the neighbor device Displays the Chassis ID of the neighbor device Displays the system description of the neighbor device Displays the port number of the neighbor linking to local port Click Information to display the detailed information of the neighbor device 198 14 3 Device Statistics You can view the LLDP statistics of the local device through this feature Choose the menu LLDP Device Statistics Statistic Info to load the following page Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Enable Disable Apply Refresh Rate sec 3 300 Global Statistics Last Update Total Inserts Total Deletes Total Drops Total Ageouts 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 0 Meighbors Statistics Port Transmit Receive i TLY TL dol Total Total pistei iils speet Discards Unknowns 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 A 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 g 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 v Figure 14 5 LLDP Statistic Information The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Enable Disable the auto refresh function Refresh Rate Specify the auto refresh rate gt Global Statistics Last Update Displays latest update time of the statistics Total Inserts D
207. lications defined for the network policy Displays the location identification of the neighbor Displays the power type of the neighbor device Power Sourcing Entity PSE or Powered Device PD Click the Information button to display the detailed information of the corresponding neighbor Return to CONTENTS 205 Chapter 15 Cluster With the development of network technology the network scale is getting larger and more network devices are required which may result in a more complicated network management system As a large number of devices need to be assigned different network addresses and every management device needs to be respectively configured to meet the application requirements manpower are needed The Cluster Management function can solve the above problem It is mainly used to central manage the scattered devices in the network A network administrator can manage and maintain the switches in the cluster via a management switch The management switch is the commander of the cluster and the others are member switches The typical topology is as follows administrator 10 90 90 100 Member switch Member switch Member switch Member switch Candidate switch Figure 15 1 Cluster topology gt Cluster Role According to their functions and status in a cluster switches in the cluster play different roles You can specify the role a switch plays There are three roles Commander Switch Indicates the device
208. licy to the VLAN The following entries are displayed on this screen gt VLAN Bind Config Policy Name VLAN ID gt VLAN Bind Table Index Policy Name VLAN ID Direction Configuration Procedure Select the name of the policy you want to bind Enter the ID of the VLAN you want to bind Displays the index of the binding policy Displays the name of the binding policy Displays the ID of the VLAN bound to the corresponding policy Displays the binding direction Step Operation Description 1 Configure effective Required On ACL Time Range configuration pages time range configure the effective time ranges for ACLs 2 Configure ACL rules Required On ACL gt ACL Config configuration pages configure ACL rules to match packets 3 Configure Policy Required On ACL gt Policy Config configuration pages configure the policy to control the data packets those match the corresponding ACL rules 4 Bind the policy to port VLAN the Required On ACL gt Policy Binding configuration pages bind the policy to the port VLAN to make the policy effective on the corresponding port VLAN 11 5 Application Example for ACL gt Network Requirements 1 The manager of the R amp D department can access to the forum of the company and the Internet without any forbiddance The MAC address of the manager is 00 46 A5 5D 12 C3 2 The staff of the R amp D department can not access to t
209. llowing page 33 Port Security Select Port OOOOOOO000000 Note Max Learned MAC Learned Num Learn Mode Status Dynamic v Disable v 64 0 Dynamic Disable A 64 0 Dynamic Disable 64 0 Dynamic Disable 64 0 Dynamic Disable 64 0 Dynamic Disable 64 0 Dynamic Disable Ly 64 0 Dynarnic Disable 64 0 Dynamic Disable 64 0 Dynamic Disable 64 0 Dynamic Disable 64 0 Dynamic Disable 64 0 Dynamic Disable v The maximum number of MAC addresses learned from individual port can be setto 64 Figure 5 4 Port Security The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Security Select Port Max Learned MAC Learned Num Learn Mode Status Select the desired port for Port Security configuration It is multi optional Displays the port number Specify the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port Displays the number of MAC addresses that have been learned on the port Select the Learn Mode for the port Dynamic When Dynamic mode is selected the learned MAC address will be deleted automatically after the aging time Static When Static mode is selected the learned MAC address will be out of the influence of the aging time and can only be deleted manually The learned entries will be cleared after the switch is rebooted Permanent When Permanent mode is selected the learned MAC address will be out of the influence of the aging time and can on
210. lt diagnosis capacity planning and report generating gt SNMP Management Frame SNMP management frame includes three network elements SNMP Management Station SNMP Agent and MIB Management Information Base SNMP Management Station SNMP Management Station is the workstation for running the SNMP client program providing a friendly management interface for the administrator to manage the most network devices conveniently SNMP Agent Agent is the server software operated on network devices with the responsibility of receiving and processing the request packets from SNMP Management Station In the meanwhile Agent will inform the SNMP Management Station of the events whenever the device status changes or the device encounters any abnormalities such as restarting the device MIB MIB is the set of the managed objects MIB defines a few attributes of the managed objects including the names the access rights and the data types Every SNMP Agent has its own MIB The SNMP Management station can read write the MIB objects based on its management right SNMP Management Station is the manager of SNMP network while SNMP Agent is the managed object The information between SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent are exchanged through SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol The relationship among SNMP Management Station SNMP Agent and MIB is illustrated in the following figure MIB Read Configure the MIB variables Send response an
211. ly be deleted manually The learned entries will be saved even the switch is rebooted Select Enable Disable the Port Security feature for the port 34 n ote 1 The Port Security function is disabled for the LAG port member Only the port is removed from the LAG will the Port Security function be available for the port 2 The Port Security function is disabled when the 802 1X function is enabled 5 1 4 Port Isolation Port Isolation provides a method of restricting traffic flow to improve the network security by forbidding the port to forward packets to the ports that are not on its forward portlist Choose the menu Switching Port Port Isolation to load the following page Port Isolation Config Port 11 Forward Portlist O a O 2 O 3 O a Os O 6 O 7 O s Og O10 O11 O12 113 Ora O15 O16 O17 O18 Ora O 20 C21 O22 O23 O 24 al Port Isolation List Port Forward Portlist 1 1 24 A 2 1 24 3 1 24 4 1 24 5 1 24 6 1 24 7 1 24 8 1 24 9 1 24 10 1 24 J 11 1 24 12 1 24 13 1 24 14 1 24 15 1 24 lt Figure 5 5 Port Isolation Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Isolation Config Port Select the port number to set its forwardlist Forward Portlist Select the port that to be forwarded to 35 gt Port Isolation List Port Display the port number Forward Portlist Display the forwardlist 5 2 LAG LAG Link Aggregation Group is to combine a number of ports
212. menu Network Security gt DoS Defend DoS Defend to load the following page 165 Configure DoS Protection Enable Disable Defend Table Select Defend Type Land Attack Scan SYNFIN xmascan NULL Scan SYN sPortless 1024 Blat Attack Ping Flooding SYNISYN ACK Flooding Figure 12 16 DoS Defend The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Configure DoS Defend Enable Disable DoS Defend function gt Defend Table Select Select the entry to enable the corresponding Defend Type Defend Type Displays the Defend Type name Tips You are suggested to take the following further steps to ensure the network security 1 It s recommended to inspect and repair the system vulnerability regularly It is also necessary to install the system bulletins and backup the important information in time 2 The network administrator is suggested to inspect the physic environment of the network and block the unnecessary network services 3 Enhance the network security via the protection devices such as the hardware firewall 12 4 802 1X The 802 1X protocol was developed by IEEE802 LAN WAN committee to deal with the security issues of wireless LANs It was then used in Ethernet as a common access control mechanism for LAN ports to solve mainly authentication and security problems 802 1X is a port based network access control protocol It authenticates and controls devices requesting for access in terms of the ports o
213. n gt Search Option Source Binding Table IP Select Select Host Name IP Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port Protect Type Source Collision aan ote 1 12 1 2 Manual Binding Select a Source from the pull down list and click the Search button to view your desired entry in the Binding Table e All All the bound entries will be displayed e Manual Only the manually added entries will be displayed e Scanning Only the entries formed via ARP Scanning will be displayed e Snooping Only the entries formed via DHCP Snooping will be displayed Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding entry based on the IP address you entered Select the desired entry to modify the Host Name and Protect Type It is multi optional Displays the Host Name here Displays the IP Address of the Host Displays the MAC Address of the Host Displays the VLAN ID here Displays the number of port connected to the Host Allows you to view and modify the Protect Type of the entry Displays the Source of the entry Displays the Collision status of the entry e Warning Indicates that the collision may be caused by the MSTP function e Critical Indicates that the entry has a collision with the other entries Among the entries with Critical collision level the one with the highest Source priority will take effect Among the conflicting entries with the same Source priority only the
214. n gt LAG Table Member Port Select the port as the LAG member Clearing all the ports of the LAG will delete this LAG Tips 1 The LAG can be deleted by clearing its all member ports 2 A port can only be added to a LAG If a port is the member of a LAG or is dynamically aggregated as the LACP member the port number will be displayed in gray and can not be selected 5 2 3 LACP Config LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol is defined in IEEE802 3ad and enables the dynamic link aggregation and disaggregation by exchanging LACP packets with its partner The switch can dynamically group similarly configured ports into a single logical link which will highly extend the bandwidth and flexibly balance the load With the LACP feature enabled the port will notify its partner of the system priority system MAC port priority port number and operation key operation key is determined by the physical properties of the port upper layer protocol and admin key The device with higher priority will lead the aggregation and disaggregation System priority and system MAC decide the priority of the device The smaller the system priority the higher the priority of the device is With the same system priority the device owning the smaller system MAC has the higher priority The device with the higher priority will choose the ports to be aggregated based on the port priority port number and operation key Only the ports with the same operation key
215. n process by specifying the Authentication Method Guest VLAN and various Timers Choose the menu Network Security gt 802 1X Global Config to load the following page 170 Global Config 802 1 Enable Disable Auth Method EAP MDS v jaa Apply Guest VLAN Enable Disable Guest VLAN ID 2 4094 Authentication Config Quiet O Enable Disable Quiet Period sec 1 999 Retry Times 3 1 9 Apply Supplicant Timeout 3 Server Timeout 3 sec 1 9 _ sec 1 9 Figure 12 20 Global Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt gt Global Config 802 1X Authentication Method Guest VLAN Guest VLAN ID Authentication Config Quiet Enable Disable the 802 1X function Select the Authentication Method from the pull down list e EAP MD5 IEEE 802 1X authentication system uses extensible authentication protocol EAP to exchange information between the switch and the client The EAP protocol packets with authentication data can be encapsulated in the advanced protocol such as RADIUS packets to be transmitted to the authentication server e PAP IEEE 802 1X authentication system uses extensible authentication protocol EAP to exchange information between the switch and the client The transmission of EAP packets is terminated at the switch and the EAP packets are converted to the other protocol such as RADIUS packets for transmission En
216. nalyze the network abnormity Choose the menu Switching Traffic Monitor Traffic Summary to load the following page Auto Refresh Auto Refresh O Enable Disable Apply Refresh Rate sec 3 300 Traffic Summary Port Port Packets Rx Packets Tx Octets Rx Octets Tx Statistics 1 0 0 0 0 Statistics A 2 0 0 0 0 Statistics 3 0 0 0 0 Statistics 4 0 0 0 0 Statistics 5 0 0 0 0 Statistics 6 0 0 0 0 statistics J 7 0 0 0 0 Statistics 8 0 0 0 0 Statistics g 0 0 0 0 Statistics 10 0 0 0 0 Statistics 11 0 0 0 0 Statistics 12 0 0 0 0 Statistics v Figure 5 10 Traffic Summary The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Allows you to Enable Disable refreshing the Traffic Summary automatically 41 Refresh Rate gt Traffic Summary Port Select Port Packets Rx Packets Tx Octets Rx Octets Tx Statistics Enter a value in seconds to specify the refresh interval Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Displays the port number Displays the number of packets received on the port The error packets are not counted in Displays the number of packets transmitted on the port Displays the number of octets received on the port The error octets are counted in Displays the number of octets transmitted on the port Click the Statistics button to view the detailed traffic statistics of th
217. nation IP address Destination MAC address 192 168 0 103 00 OF 12 0E ED 2D 192 168 0 102 00 01 21 AF OF 4E ARP Response Unicast Figure 12 3 ARP Implementation Procedure 1 Suppose there are two hosts in the LAN Host A and Host B To send a packet to Host B Host A checks its own ARP Table first to see if the ARP entry related to the IP address of Host B exists If yes Host A will directly send the packets to Host B If the corresponding MAC address is not found in the ARP Table Host A will broadcast ARP request packet which contains the IP address of Host B the IP address of Host A and the MAC address of Host A in the LAN 2 Since the ARP request packet is broadcasted all hosts in the LAN can receive it However only the Host B recognizes and responds to the request Host B sends back an ARP reply packet to Host A with its MAC address carried in the packet 3 Upon receiving the ARP reply packet Host A adds the IP address and the corresponding MAC address of Host B to its ARP Table for the further packets forwarding ARP Scanning function enables the switch to send the ARP request packets of the specified IP field to the Hosts in the LAN or VLAN Upon receiving the ARP reply packet the switch can get the IP address MAC address VLAN and the connected port number of the Host by analyzing the packet and bind them conveniently Choose the menu Network Security IP MAC Binding ARP Scanning to load the following page 15
218. nction e Critical Indicates that the entry has a collision with the other entries Nowadays the network is getting larger and more complicated The amount of the PCs always exceeds that of the assigned IP addresses The wireless network and the laptops are widely used and the locations of the PCs are always changed Therefore the corresponding IP address of the 151 PC should be updated with a few configurations DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol the network configuration protocol optimized and developed based on the BOOTP functions to solve the above mentioned problems gt DHCP Working Principle DHCP works via the Client Server communication mode The Client applies to the Server for configuration The Server assigns the configuration information such as the IP address to the Client so as to reach a dynamic employ of the network source A Server can assign the IP address for several Clients which is illustrated in the following figure DHCP Server Access Layer Switch Central Switch DHCP Client 1 DHCP Client 2 DHCP Client 3 DHCP Client 4 Figure 12 5 Network diagram for DHCP snooping implementation For different DHCP Clients DHCP Server provides three IP address assigning methods 1 Manually assign the IP address Allows the administrator to bind the static IP address to the specific Client e g WWW Server via the DHCP Server 2 Automatically assign the IP address DHCP Server assigns the IP a
219. nction enabled on the switch the switch shuts down the edge ports that receive BPDUs and reports these cases to the administrator If a port is shut down only the administrator can restore it gt BPDU Filter BPDU filter function is to prevent BPDUs flood in the STP network If a switch receives malicious BPDUs it forwards these BPDUs to the other switched in the network which may result in spanning trees being continuously regenerated In this case the switch occupying too much CPU or the protocol status of BPDUs is wrong With BPDU filter function enabled a port does not receive or forward BPDUs but it sends out its own BPDUs Such a mechanism prevents the switch from being attacked by BPDUs so as to guarantee generation the spanning trees correct Choose the menu Spanning Tree STP Security Port Protect to load the following page 87 Port Protect Select Port Loop Protect Port RootProtect TC Protect BPDU Protect BPDU Filter LAG Disable v Disable Disable v Disable w di Disable v O 1 Disable O 2 Disable O 3 Disable O 4 Disable O 5 Disable O 6 Disable O 7 Disable O 8 Disable O g Disable O 10 Disable O 11 Disable O 12 Disable O 13 Disable O 14 Disable O 15 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable A Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable E Disable Disable Disable Disab
220. nd the values of the special fields If a packet is matched the switch will add a corresponding VLAN tag to it 59 automatically and thus the data of specific protocol can be automatically assigned to the corresponding VLAN for transmission The network administrator can manage network clients based on their specific applications and services through protocol VLAN gt Encapsulation Format of Ethernet Data This section simply introduces the common used encapsulation format of Ethernet data to understand the procedure for the switch to identify the protocol of packets At present there are two encapsulation formats of Ethernet data Etthernet Il encapsulation and 802 2 802 3 encapsulation shown as follows e Ethernet II encapsulation e 802 2 802 3 encapsulation DA and SA respectively refer to destination MAC address and source MAC address The number indicates the length of the field in bytes for example the length of source MAC address is 12 bytes As the maximum length of Ethernet data is 1500 bytes that is OxO5DC in hexadecimal the Length field in 802 2 802 3 encapsulation ranges from 0x0000 to 0x05DC but the Type field in Ethernet Il encapsulation ranges from 0x0600 to OxFFF The Type or Length field in the range of OxO5DD to Ox05FF is recognized as illegal and will be directly discarded The switch identifies whether a packet is Ethernet Il packet or 802 2 802 3 packet according to the ranges of the two fields 802 2
221. need For this Switch the sub options are defined as the following The Circuit ID is defined to be the number of the port which receives the DHCP Request packets and its VLAN number The Remote ID is defined to be the MAC address of DHCP Snooping device which receives the DHCP Request packets from DHCP Clients gt DHCP Cheating Attack During the working process of DHCP generally there is no authentication mechanism between Server and Client If there are several DHCP servers in the network network confusion and security problem will happen The common cases incurring the illegal DHCP servers are the following two 1 Its common that the illegal DHCP server is manually configured by the user by mistake 2 Hacker exhausted the IP addresses of the normal DHCP server and then pretended to be a legal DHCP server to assign the IP addresses and the other parameters to Clients For example hacker used the pretended DHCP server to assign a modified DNS server address to users so as to induce the users to the evil financial website or electronic trading website and cheat the users of their accounts and passwords The following figure illustrates the DHCP Cheating Attack implementation procedure Switch with DHCP Snooping Function disabled lllegal DHCP Response Packets DHCP Client Illegal DHCP Server DHCP Server Figure 12 7 DHCP Cheating Attack Implementation Procedure DHCP Snooping feature only allows the port connected to the DHCP S
222. nformation that the managed device initiatively sends to the Network management station without request Inform Inform packet is sent to inform the management station and ask for the reply The switch will resend the inform request if it doesn t get the response from the management station during the Timeout interval and it will terminate resending the inform request if the resending times reach the specified Retry times The Inform type has a higher security than the Trap type which is employed on SNMPv3 On this page you can configure the notification function of SNMP Choose the menu SNMP Notification Notification to load the following page 184 Create Notification IP Address UDP Port 162 J User Security Model v1 Type Trap Y Security Level vi Retry Timeout Notification Table Select IP Address UDP Port zj 1 258 sec 1 3800 User Peachy Security Level Type Timeout Retry Operation A Figure 13 8 Notification Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Notification IP Address UDP Port User Security Model Security Level Type Retry Timeout gt Notification Table Enter the IP Address of the management Host Enter the number of the UDP port used to send notifications The UDP port functions with the IP address for the notification sending The default is 162 Enter the User name
223. ng Required On QoS gt DiffServ 802 1P Priority page relation between the 802 1P configure the mapping relation between the 802 1P priority and TC priority and TC 2 Select a schedule mode Required On QoS DiffServ gt Schedule Mode page select a schedule mode 9 1 4 DSCP Priority On this page you can configure DSCP priority DSCP DiffServ Code Point is a new definition to IP ToS field given by IEEE This field is used to divide IP datagram into 64 priorities When DSCP Priority is enabled IP datagram are mapped to different priority levels based on DSCP priority mode non IP datagram with 802 1Q tag are mapped to different priority levels based on 802 1P priority mode if 8021 1P Priority mode is enabled the untagged non IP datagram are mapped based on port priority mode Choose the menu QoS DiffServ DSCP Priority to load the following page 115 DSCP Priority Config Enable Disable Priority v DSCP Priority 1 Cos0 5 3 Cos0 5 Cos0 7 Cos0 J 9 Cos1 11 Cost 13 Cos1 15 Cos1 17 CoS2 19 CoS2 lt DSCP Priority Priority Level DSCP B DSCP Priority 0 Cos0 2 Coso 4 Cos0 6 Cos0 8 Cosi 10 Cost 12 Cost 14 Cos 16 Cos2 18 Cos2 note Ifthe DSCP mapped topriorityis selected IP datagram are mapped to different priority levels based on the mapping relation between the CoS and TC in 802 1P DSCP Priority Figure 9 9 DSCP Priority The following entries are displayed on this scr
224. ng entries are displayed on this screen gt Log Host Index Displays the index of the log host The switch supports 4 log hosts Host IP Configure the IP for the log host UDP Port Displays the UDP port used for receiving sending log information Here we use the standard port 514 Severity Specify the severity level of the log information sent to each log host Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value will be sent to the corresponding log host Status Enable Disable the log host n ote The Log Server software is not provided If necessary please download it on the Internet 16 2 4 Backup Log Backup Log feature enables the system logs saved in the switch to be output as a file for device diagnosis and statistics analysis When a critical error results in the breakdown of the system you can export the logs to get some related important information about the error for device diagnosis after the switch is restarted Choose the menu Maintenance gt Log gt Backup Log to load the following page Backup Log Click the button here to backup the log file Note It will take a few minutes to backup the log file Please wait without any operation Figure 16 6 Backup Log 226 The following entry is displayed on this screen gt Backup Log Backup Log Click the Backup Log button to save the log as a file to your computer n ote It will take a few minutes to backup the log file Please wait without
225. nstance Config tddi 83 7 3 3 Instance Port Conti iicvonia sisi ar perth 84 GAS O 86 7 4 1 Port Protection arta Di 86 GAZ WC Protec ia 89 7 5 Application Example for STP Function ooooocococccccncnonconcncnnnncononnnnnonnnnnnnoninnannnnnnnnnaninnns 89 Chapter MultiCaS toco A A A ds ae ee es 93 8 1 IGMP SnoOOpIngG et a eee ais 95 8 1 1 SNOOPINO Contig 24s watt A a A peta fees 96 8 1 2 Port Config sep reli ra leds Matta tana 97 A A A sel hdc a ee eieh aM Sahel 98 9154 Multicast VLAN lactacin spied Slap Sada A foe hls adda etal a Nn at 100 9 2 MulticaSt Pisa 103 8 2 1 Multicast PTable lt ovio ri il dr 104 8 22 Static MUltiCastlP src hain anaes 104 9 37 MUultiCasSt Elder as 105 8 3 1 IP Range ri latest a a Ei eaa aa Eai 106 8 32 Pom F ET r i creat aa aaar maa e aa aae raet ta aar eao iaaea 107 8 4 Packet Statistics A 108 Chapter 9 QOS ainia eel eet reels a ds 110 91 SIDINS CIN 32 4 nck eens ree i i A ee a ld kes 113 9 1 1 Prt 2 Ls A 00 OPE O oct e e ial Manis Goel eA hce cea cuuhtau enh dads 113 91 22 Schedule Modei cia A te tana ii 114 9 1 3 8021P PONY mr te ee oO mo ee 115 Gara A cadet eal aac tee achls ater AE 115 9 2 gt Bandwidth Control sagres e ote Ae bene atin Ae aerated aaa aah Oe 117 9 21 Ratios id it idos 117 9 22 Storm Controlicteiediicenach ii To 118 13 Mole VLAN Stata E E et ed ee ego dl crateaad 120 9 3 1 Global Config uri oct 122 9 3 2 Port CONTI att italian ea O e a deed ainda
226. o the Client Otherwise the Server will send the DHCP NAK packet to refuse assigning this IP address to the Client gt Option 82 The DHCP packets are classified into 8 types with the same format based on the format of BOOTP packet The difference between DHCP packet and BOOTP packet is the Option field The Option field of the DHCP packet is used to expand the function for example the DHCP can transmit the control information and network parameters via the Option field so as to assign the IP address to the Client dynamically For the details of the DHCP Option please refer to RFC 2132 Option 82 records the location of the DHCP Client Upon receiving the DHCP REQUEST packet the switch adds the Option 82 to the packet and then transmits the packet to DHCP Server Administrator can be acquainted with the location of the DHCP Client via Option 82 so as to locate the DHCP Client for fulfilling the security control and account management of Client The Server supported Option 82 also can set the distribution policy of IP addresses and the other parameters according to the Option 82 providing more flexible address distribution way 153 Option 82 can contain 255 sub options at most If Option 82 is defined at least a sub option should be defined This Switch supports two sub options Circuit ID and Remote ID Since there is no universal standard about the content of Option 82 different manufacturers define the sub options of Option 82 to their
227. o the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment CE Mark Warning CE This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures SAFETY NOTICES A Caution Do not use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Avoid using this product during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning CONTENTS Package Content emision 1 Chapter 1 About this GuUide ooooccccinononcoccccncnccccnnnnononcnnnnnoconnnnnonnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninannnnnennnncininess 2 1 1 Intended RELATOS ia A A AAA A ai 2 120 CONVENTIONS e A de AA eines ee iene 2 1 3 Overview of This Guide oooooccccccnnncnocoocccnccoconcnnonncnnonononnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnaninninannnnss 2 Chapter 2 Introductions manira anas ieden el lena rA aaa cad EE aaa dE a ETENEE aaraa 6 ZT Overview ofthe Switch nr a ee oe vee e e iaa 6 2 2 Mae ars ii a eal es As aa eee thn ee aed eee PS 6 2 3 Appearance DeSCription eiia ra a aaia a d a e d aa Enh 7 2 3 1 Front Panel ic 8 A Mannie iy le a a
228. ocation Identification Parameters O Emergency Number Chars 10 25 O Civic Address What Country Code Language Province State CountyParish District CitwTownship Street House Number Name Postal Zip Code Room Number Post Office Box Additional Information gt Included TLVs Select TLVs to be included in outgoing LLDPDU gt Location Identification Parameters Configure the Location Identification TLV s content in outgoing LLDPDU of the port Emergency Emergency number is Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier Number which is used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk based PSAP Civic Address The Civic address is defined to reuse the relevant sub fields of the DHCP option for Civic Address based Location Configuration Information as specified by IETF 14 4 3 Local Info On this page you can see all ports LLDP MED configuration Choose the menu LLDP LLDP MED gt Local Info to load the following page 203 Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Enable Disable Refresh Rate sec 3 300 LLDP MED Local Info Local Interface 1 Device Type Network Connectivity Application Type Reserved Unknown Policy Flag Yes VLAN tagged No Media Policy VLAN ID 0 Media Policy Layer 2 Priority 0 Media Policy DSCP 0 Power Type PSE Device Power Source Prima
229. of IP Protocol DSCP Enter the DSCP information contained in the rule IP ToS Enter the IP ToS contained in the rule IP Pre Enter the IP Precedence contained in the rule 139 Time Range Select the time range for the rule to take effect 11 3 Policy Config A Policy is used to control the data packets those match the corresponding ACL rules by configuring ACLs and actions together for effect The operations here include stream mirror stream condition QoS remarking and redirect The Policy Config can be implemented on Policy Summary Police Create and Action Create pages 11 3 1 Policy Summary On this page you can view the ACL and the corresponding operations in the policy Choose the menu ACL gt Policy Config Policy Summary to load the following page Select Options Select a Policy Action Table Select Index ACL ID S Mirror S Condition Redirect QoS Remark Operation Al Figure 11 9 Policy Summary The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Search Option Select Policy Select name of the desired policy for view If you want to delete the desired policy please click the Delete button gt Action Table Select Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding policy Index Enter the index of the policy ACL ID Displays the ID of the ACL contained in the policy S Mirror Displays the source mirror port of the policy S Condition Displays the source condition added to the policy R
230. of the MAC address Aging Status Displays the Aging Status of the MAC address Bind Click the Bind button to bind the MAC address of your selected entry to the corresponding port statically Tips Setting aging time properly helps implement effective MAC address aging The aging time that is too long or too short results decreases the performance of the switch If the aging time is too long excessive invalid MAC address entries maintained by the switch may fill up the MAC address table This prevents the MAC address table from updating with network changes in time If the aging time is too short the switch may remove valid MAC address entries This decreases the forwarding performance of the switch It is recommended to keep the default value 5 4 4 Filtering Address The filtering address is to forbid the undesired packets to be forwarded The filtering address can be added or removed manually independent of the aging time The filtering MAC address allows the switch to filter the packets which includes this MAC address as the source address or destination address so as to guarantee the network security The filtering MAC address entries act on all the ports in the corresponding VLAN Choose the menu Switching MAC Address gt Filtering Address to load the following page Create Filtering Address MAC Address Format 00 00 00 00 00 01 VLAN ID 1 4094 Search Option Search Option All v mi Filt
231. of the management station Select the Security Model of the management station Select the Security Level for the SNMP v3 User enoAuthNoPriv No authentication and no privacy security level are used eauthNoPriv Only the authentication security level is used eauthPriv Both the authentication and the privacy security levels are used Select the type for the notifications e Trap Indicates traps are sent e Inform Indicates informs are sent The Inform type has a higher security than the Trap type Specify the amount of times the switch resends an inform request The switch will resend the inform request if it doesn t get the response from the management station during the Timeout interval and it will terminate resending the inform request if the resending times reach the specified Retry times Specify the maximum time for the switch to wait for the response from the management station before resending a request 185 Select Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding management station IP Address Displays the IP Address of the management host UDP Port Displays the UDP port used to send notifications User Displays the User name of the management station Security Model Displays the Security Model of the management station Security Level Displays the Security Level for the SNMP v3 User Type Displays the type of the notifications Timeout Displays the maximum time for the switch to wait for th
232. oftware TpSupplicant English exe Unable To Locate Component 7 x Q This application has failed to start because wpcap dil was not found Re installing the application may Fix this problem It s because the supported DLL file is missing You are suggested to go to http Awww winpcap org to download WinPcap 4 0 2 or the higher version for installation and run the client software again Is this TP LINK 802 1X Client Software compliable with the switches of the other manufacturers No This TP LINK 802 1X Client Software is customized for TP LINK switches Is it safe to set the password being automatically saved Yes The password saved in the configuration files is encrypted Return to CONTENTS 247 Appendix E Glossary Access Control List ACL ACLs can limit network traffic and restrict access to certain users or devices by checking each packet for certain IP or MAC i e Layer 2 information Boot Protocol BOOTP BOOTP is used to provide bootup information for network devices including IP address information the address of the TFTP server that contains the devices system files and the name of the boot file Class of Service CoS CoS is supported by prioritizing packets based on the required level of service and then placing them in the appropriate output queue Data is transmitted from the queues using weighted round robin service to enforce priority service and prevent blockage of lower level queues Priority m
233. on the ARP Scanning page for the scanning 3 DHCP Snooping You can use DHCP Snooping functions to monitor the process of the Host obtaining the IP address from DHCP server and record the IP address MAC address VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host for automatic binding These three methods are also considered as the sources of the IP MAC Binding entries The entries from various sources should be different from one another to avoid collision Among the entries in collision only the entry from the source with the highest priority will take effect These three sources Manual Scanning and Snooping are in descending order of priority The IP MAC Binding function is implemented on the Binding Table Manual Binding ARP Scanning and DHCP Snooping pages 12 1 1 Binding Table On this page you can view the information of the bound entries Choose the menu Network Security IP MAC Binding Binding Table to load the following page Search Option Source All y Binding Table el selec Select Host Name IP Address MAC Address YVLANID Port Protect Type Source Collision sl xj Apply Delete Help Entry Count 0 Note 1 Among the entries with critical collision level the one having the highest Source priority will take effect 2 Among the entries with the same Source priority only the last added or edited one will take effect Figure 12 1 Binding Table 147 The following entries are displayed on this scree
234. onfig Port Select Port Description Status Speed and Duplex Flow Control LAG O Disable v 10MHD Disable v O 1 Enable Auto Disable o A O 2 Enable Auto Disable O 3 Enable Auto Disable O 4 Enable Auto Disable O 5 Enable Auto Disable O 6 Enable Auto Disable O 7 Enable Auto Disable O 8 Enable Auto Disable J O 3 Enable Auto Disable O 10 Enable Auto Disable O 11 Enable Auto Disable O 12 Enable Auto Disable Fi 13 Enable Auto Disable O 14 Enable Auto Disable O 15 Enable Auto Disable v Note The Port Description should be not more than 16 characters Figure 5 1 Port Config Here you can view and configure the port parameters Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select Select the desired port for configuration It is multi optional 30 Port Description Status Speed and Duplex Flow Control LAG An ote Displays the port number Give a description to the port for identification Allows you to Enable Disable the port When Enable is selected the port can forward the packets normally Select the Speed and Duplex mode for the port The device connected to the switch should be in the same Speed and Duplex mode with the switch When Auto is selected the Speed and Duplex mode wil be determined by auto negotiation For the SFP port this Switch does not support auto negotiation Allows you to Enable Disable the Flow
235. onfiguration for voice data ensuring the transmission priority of voice data stream and voice quality gt OUl Address Organizationally unique identifier address The switch can determine whether a received packet is a voice packet by checking its source MAC address If the source MAC address of packets complies with the OUI addresses configured by the system the packets are determined as voice packets and transmitted in voice VLAN An OUI address is a unique identifier assigned by IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers to a device vendor It comprises the first 24 bits of a MAC address You can recognize which vendor a device belongs to according to the OUI address The following table shows the OUI addresses of several manufacturers The following OUI addresses are preset of the switch by default Number OUI Address 1 00 01 E3 00 00 00 Vendor Siemens phone 00 03 6B 00 00 00 Cisco phone 00 04 0D 00 00 00 Avaya phone 00 60 B9 00 00 00 Philips NEC phone 00 DO 1E 00 00 00 Pingtel phone 00 E0 75 00 00 00 Polycom phone NIOJ oO Bl OJIN 00 E0 BB 00 00 00 3com phone Table 9 1 OUI addresses on the switch gt Port Voice VLAN Mode A voice VLAN can operate in two modes automatic mode and manual mode Automatic Mode In this mode the switch will automatically add a port which receives voice packets to voice VLAN and determine the priority of the
236. onfigure the port priority Choose the menu QoS DiffServ Port Priority to load the following page Port Priority Config Select Port Priority LAG Cos 0 v CoS 0 CoS 0 cosa CoS 0 CoS 0 cosa CoS 0 CoS 0 CoS 0 cosa OOOOOO0O00000 gt oP ON OH ek wh lt note Port priority is one property of the port When the port priority is specified the data will be classified into the egress queue based on the CoS value of the ingress port and the mapping relation between the CoS and TC in 802 1P Figure 9 6 Port Priority Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Priority Config Select Select the desired port to configure its priority It is multi optional Port Displays the physical port number of the switch Priority Specify the priority for the port LAG Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to Configuration Procedure 113 Step Operation Description Select the port priority Required On QoS DiffServ Port Priority page configure the port priority 2 Configure the mapping Required On QoS gt DiffServ 802 1P Priority page relation between the 802 1P configure the mapping relation between the 802 1P priority and TC priority and TC 3 Select a schedule mode Required On QoS DiffServ gt Schedule Mode 9 1 2 Schedule Mode On this page you can select a schedule mode for the switch
237. ongs to Click the Recover button to restore the port to the normal status The ARP Defend for this port will be re enabled 1 It s not recommended to enable the ARP Defend feature for the LAG member port 2 ARP Detect and ARP Defend cannot be enabled at the same time 163 12 2 3 ARP Statistics ARP Statistics feature displays the number of the illegal ARP packets received on each port which facilitates you to locate the network malfunction and take the related protection measures Choose the menu Network Security ARP Inspection ARP Statistics to load the following page Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Enable Disable Apply Refresh Interval sec 3 300 Illegal ARP Packet Port Trusted Pot Illegal ARP Packet Port Trusted Port Illegal ARP Packet 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 No 6 No 7 No 8 No 9 No 10 No 11 No 12 No 13 No 14 No 15 No 16 No Ae No 18 No 19 No 20 No 21 No 22 No 23 No 24 No Figure 12 15 ARP Statistics The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Enable Disable the Auto Refresh feature Refresh Interval Specify the refresh interval to display the ARP Statistics gt Illegal ARP Packet Port Displays the port number Trusted Port Indicates the port is an ARP Trusted Port or not Illegal ARP Packet Displays the number of the received illegal ARP packets 1
238. onnected to the switch test if the port of the switch and the connected device are available e Network Diagnose Test if the destination is reachable and the account of router hops from the switch to the destination Appendix A Specifications Lists the hardware specifications of the Switch Appendix B Configure the PCs Introduces how to configure the PCs Appendix C System Maintenance via FTP Introduces how to load software of the switch using FTP function Appendix D 802 1X Client Software Introduces how to use 802 1X Client Software provided for authentication Appendix E Glossary Lists the glossary used in this manual Return to CONTENTS Chapter 2 Introduction Thanks for choosing the TL SG3424P JetStream L2 Managed PoE Switch 2 1 Overview of the Switch Designed for workgroups and departments TL SG3424P from TP LINK provides wire speed performance and abundant layer 2 management features It provides a variety of service features and multiple powerful functions with high security The ElA standardized framework and smart configuration capacity can provide flexible solutions for a variable scale of networks ACL 802 1x and Dynamic ARP Inspection provide robust security strategies QoS and IGMP snooping filtering optimize voice and video application Link aggregation LACP increases aggregated bandwidth optimizing the transport of business critical data SNMP RMON WEB CLI Telnet Lo
239. orts by receiving and processing BPDU packets from the upstream switch However when link congestions or link failures occurred to the network a down stream switch does not receive BPDU packets for certain period which results in spanning trees being regenerated and roles of ports being reselected and causes the blocked ports to transit to forwarding state Therefore loops may be incurred in the network The loop protect function can suppresses loops With this function enabled a port regardless of the role it plays in instances is always set to blocking state when the port does not receive BPDU packets from the upstream switch and spanning trees are regenerated and thereby loops can be prevented gt Root Protect 86 A CIST and its secondary root bridges are usually located in the high bandwidth core region Wrong configuration or malicious attacks may result in configuration BPDU packets with higher priorities being received by the legal root bridge which causes the current legal root bridge to lose its position and network topology jitter to occur In this case flows that should travel along high speed links may lead to low speed links and network congestion may occur To avoid this MSTP provides root protect function Ports with this function enabled can only be set as designated ports in all spanning tree instances When a port of this type receives BDPU packets with higher priority it transits its state to blocking state and
240. packets through learning the source MAC of the UNTAG packets sent from IP phone when it is powered on The aging time of voice VLAN can be configured on the switch If the switch does not receive any voice packet on the ingress port within the aging time the switch will remove this port from voice VLAN Voice ports are automatically added into or removed from voice VLAN Manual Mode You need to manually add the port of IP phone to voice VLAN and then the switch will assign ACL rules and configure the priority of the packets through learning the source MAC address of packets and matching OUI address In practice the port voice VLAN mode is configured according to the type of packets sent out from voice device and the link type of the port The following table shows the detailed information 120 Port Voice VLAN Voice Link type of the port and processing mode Mode Stream Type Automatic Mode TAG voice ACCESS Not supported stream TRUNK Supported The default VLAN of the port can not be voice VLAN GENERAL Supported The default VLAN of the port can not be voice VLAN and the egress rule of the access port in the default VLAN should be TAG UNTAG voice ACCESS Supported stream TRUNK Not supported GENERAL Supported The default VLAN of the port can not be voice VLAN and the egress rule of the access port in the voice VLAN should be UNTAG Manual Mode TAG voice ACCESS Not supported
241. packets with a forged Gateway address to the normal Host and then the Host will automatically update the ARP table after receiving the ARP packets When the Host tries to communicate with Gateway the Host will encapsulate this false destination MAC address for packets which results in a breakdown of the normal communication gt Cheating Gateway The attacker sends the wrong IP address to MAC address mapping entries of Hosts to the Gateway which causes that the Gateway can not communicate with the legal terminal Hosts normally The ARP Attack implemented by cheating Gateway is illustrated in the following figure 157 IP 192 168 0 1 MAC 00 00 00 11 11 11 2 Gateway updates its ARP table The original ARP entry of Host A 192 168 0 103 00 00 00 33 33 33 is updated to 192 168 0 103 00 00 00 12 34 56 1 Attacker sends the fake ARP packets of Host A with a forged MAC address 00 00 00 12 34 56 to Gateway 3 Gateway tries to communicate with Host A via the MAC address 00 00 00 12 34 56 but failed The normal communication is broken Switch Attacker Host A IP 192 168 0 102 IP 192 168 0 103 MAC 00 00 00 22 22 22 MAC 00 00 00 33 33 33 Figure 12 10 ARP Attack Cheating Gateway As the above figure shown the attacker sends the fake ARP packets of Host A to the Gateway and then the Gateway will automatically update its ARP table after receiving the ARP packets When the Gateway tries to communicate w
242. pgrade shown as the following figure The icon indicates it is upgrading After upgrading the TP LINK command will display Are you want to upgrade the firmware Y N y HHAHHHHHHHRRAAHRHH HH HAHAHAHA HH RRR HHH HAHHHHHHHRRAAHHH RRHH RARARHR HR RRR RRR TP LINK Please enter start command to start the switch shown as the following figure Enter the user name and password the default user name and password are both admin to login to the CLI command window and you can manage the switch via CLI command 238 Return to CONTENTS 239 Appendix D 802 1X Client Software In 802 1X mechanism the supplicant Client should be equipped with the corresponding client software complied with 802 1X protocol standard for 802 1X authentication When the switch TL SG3424P works as the authenticator system please take the following instructions to install the TpSupplicant provided on the attached CD for the supplicant Client 1 Installation Guide 1 Insert the provided CD into your CD ROM drive Open the file folder and double click the icon to load the following figure Choose the proper language and click Next to continue TpSupplicant Y2 0 InstallShield Wizard Choose Setup Language Select the lanquage for the installation from the choices below Chinese oan Figure D 1 Choose Setup Language 2 Please wait for the InstallShield Wizard preparing the setup shown as the following screen TpSupplicant 2 0 Ins
243. port is changed from Disable Rx to TxRx Tx the Fast Start Mechanism will be active the transmit interval turns to be 1 second several LLDPDUs will be sent out and then the transmit interval comes back to the regular interval 3 LLDPDU receipt mechanism When a port is working in TxRx or Rx mode the device will check the validity of the received LLDPDUs and the attached TLVs save this neighbor information to the local device and then set the aging time of this information according to the TTL value of TTL Time To Live TLV Once the TTL is O this neighbor information will be aged out immediately The aging time of the local information in the neighbor device is determined by TTL Hold Multiplier is a multiplier on the Transmit Interval that determines the actual TTL value used in an LLDPDU TTL Hold Multiplier Transmit Interval gt TLV TLV refers to Type Length Value and is contained in a LLDPDU Type identifies what kind of information is being sent Length indicates the length of information string in octets and Value is the actual information to be sent The basic TLV Format is shown as follows TLV information TLV type string length TLV information string 7 bits 9 bits 0 lt n lt 511 octets TLV header Each TLV is identified by a unique TLV type value that indicates the particular kind of information contained in the TLV The following table shows the details about the currently defined TLVs TLV type TLV Name
244. port packets the port received Displays the number of IGMPv2 report packets the port received Displays the number of IGMPv3 report packets the port received Displays the number of leave packets the port received Displays the number of error packets the port received Return to CONTENTS 109 Chapter 9 QoS QoS Quality of Service functions to provide different quality of service for various network applications and requirements and optimize the bandwidth resource distribution so as to provide a network service experience of a better quality gt QoS This switch classifies the ingress packets maps the packets to different priority queues and then forwards the packets according to specified scheduling algorithms to implement QoS function Packets are mapped to different priority queues CS Packets sent via this interface i i Packets are forwarded E E Ga T Gilda Egress interface hE Daum Oe GesS Y WO XN Ss Gila f Packets are forwarded di h rackets Scheduling shedul ode classification Figure 9 1 QoS function e Traffic classification Identifies packets conforming to certain characters according to certain rules Map The user can map the ingress packets to different priority queues based on the priority modes This switch implements three priority modes based on port on 802 1P and on DSCP e Queue scheduling algorithm When the network is congested the problem that many pac
245. pplies for joining a multicast group or responses to the IGMP query message from the router When receiving IGMP report message the switch will send the report message via the router port in the VLAN as well as analyze the message to get the address of the multicast group the host applies for joining The receiving port will be processed if the receiving port is a new member port it will be added to the multicast address table with its member port time specified if the receiving port is already a member port its member port time will be directly reset 3 IGMP Leave Message 95 The host running IGMPv1 does not send IGMP leave message when leaving a multicast group as a result the switch can not get the leave information of the host momentarily However after leaving the multicast group the host does not send IGMP report message any more so the switch will remove the port from the corresponding multicast address table when its member port time times out The host running IGMPv2 or IGMPv3 sends IGMP leave message when leaving a multicast group to inform the multicast router of its leaving When receiving IGMP leave message the switch will forward IGMP group specific query message to check if other members in the multicast group of the port need this multicast and reset the member port time to the leave time When the leave time times out the switch will remove the port from the corresponding multicast group If no other member is in th
246. provided on the CD For the installation guide please refer to Appendix D 802 1 X Client Software 3 Configure the globally 802 1X Required By default the global 802 1X function is disabled On the Network Security gt 802 1X Global Config page configure the 802 1X function globally 4 Configure the parameters of the authentication server Required On the Network Security 802 1X Radius Server page configure the parameters of the server 5 Configure the 802 1X for the port Required On the Network Security 802 1X Port Config page configure the 802 1X feature for the port of the switch based on the actual network Return to CONTENTS 174 Chapter 13 SNMP gt SNMP Overview SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol has gained the most extensive application on the UDP IP networks SNMP provides a management frame to monitor and maintain the network devices It is used for automatically managing the various network devices no matter the physical differences of the devices Currently the most network management systems are based on SNMP SNMP is simply designed and convenient for use with no need of complex fulfillment procedures and too much network resources With SNMP function enabled network administrators can easily monitor the network performance detect the malfunctions and configure the network devices In the meantime they can locate faults promptly and implement the fau
247. r entering into bootUtil menu please firstly configure the IP parameters of the switch The format is ifconfig ip xxx xxx xxx xxx mask 255 255 255 0 gateway XXX xXXX XXX XXX For example Configure the IP address as 172 31 70 22 mask as 255 255 255 0 and gateway as172 31 70 1 The detailed command is shown as the figure below Enter the command and press Enter TP LINK ifconfig ip 172 31 70 22 mask 255 255 255 0 gateway 172 31 70 1 Configure the parameters of the FTP server which keeps the upgrade firmware Later you can download the firmware to the switch from the FTP server The format of the command is ftp host xxx xxx xxx xxx user xxxxx pwd xxxxx file xxxxxx bin Here take the following parameters of the FTP server as an example IP address is 172 31 70 146 the user name and password for login to the FTP server are both 123 the name of the upgrade firmware is tl_sg3424p_up bin The detailed command is shown as the following figure Enter the command and press Enter TP LINK fto host 172 31 70 146 user 123 pwd 123 file tl_sg3424p_up bin Enter the upgrade command and press Enter to upgrade the firmware After a while the prompt You can only use the port 1 to upgrade will display in the hyper terminal shown as the following figure TP LINK upgrade You can only use the port 1 to upgrade When the prompt Are you want to upgrade the firmware Y N displays please enter Y to start upgrade or enter N to quit u
248. r mirroring port 2 Aportcan not be set as the mirrored port and the mirroring port simultaneously 3 The Port Mirror function can take effect spanning the multiple VLANs 5 1 3 Port Security MAC Address Table maintains the mapping relationship between the port and the MAC address of the connected device which is the base of the packet forwarding The capacity of MAC Address Table is fixed MAC Address Attack is the attack method that the attacker takes to obtain the network information illegally The attacker uses tools to generate the cheating MAC address and quickly occupy the MAC Address Table When the MAC Address Table is full the switch will broadcast the packets to all the ports At this moment the attacker can obtain the network information via various sniffers and attacks When the MAC Address Table is full the packets traffic will flood to all the ports which results in overload lower speed packets drop and even breakdown of the system Port Security is to protect the switch from the malicious MAC Address Attack by limiting the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port The port with Port Security feature enabled will learn the MAC address dynamically When the learned MAC address number reaches the maximum the port will stop learning Thereafter the other devices with the MAC address unlearned can not access to the network via this port Choose the menu Switching gt Port Port Security to load the fo
249. range Index Displays the index of the time range Time Range Name Displays the name of the time range Slice Displays the time slice of the time range Mode Displays the mode the time range adopts Operation Click Edit to modify this time range and click Detail to display the complete information of this time range 133 11 1 2 Time Range Create On this page you can create time ranges Choose the menu ACL gt Time Range gt Time Range Create to load the following page Create Time Range Name O Holiday O Absolute Start Date s orw 1 01 EndDate 2000 01 m y C week Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat sun Create Time Slice Start Time oo w 00 End Time 24 a Time Slice Table Index Start Time End Time Delete Figure 11 2 Time Range Create aan ote To successfully configure time ranges please firstly specify time slices and then time ranges The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Time Range Name Enter the name of the time range for time identification Holiday Select Holiday you set as a time range The ACL rule based on this time range takes effect only when the system time is within the holiday Absolute Select Absolute to configure absolute time range The ACL rule based on this time range takes effect only when the system time is within the absolute time range Week Select Week to configure week time range The ACL rule based on this time range takes ef
250. re the parameters to implement PoE function Choose the menu PoE PoE Config PoE Config to load the following page Global Config System Power Limit 320 w 1 320 Power Disconnect Method Deny Next Port xi System Power Consumption Ow System Power Remain 320w Port Config Port Select Port PoE Status PoE Priority Power Limit 0 1w 30w Time Range PoE Profile Power w Current mA Voltage PD Class Power Status Vv v v vi bo 1 Enable Low Class 4 No Limit OFF A 2 Enable Low Class 4 No Limit OFF 3 Enable Low Class 4 No Limit pa OFF 4 Enable Low Class 4 No Lirnit _ ae OFF 5 Enable Low Class 4 No Limit _ OFF 6 Enable Low Class 4 No Limit OFF i Enable Low Class 4 No Limit OFF 8 Enable Low Class 4 No Limit m s si OFF 9 Enable Low Class 4 No Limit OFF 10 Enable Low Class 4 No Limit OFF 11 Enable Low Class 4 No Limit _ OFF A 12 Enable Low Class 4 No Limit _ A OFF 13 Enable Low Class 4 No Limit a m OFF 14 Enable Low Class 4 No Limit OFF 16 Enable Low Class 4 No Limit pS OFF 3 Figure 10 1 PoE Config The following items are displayed on this screen gt Global Config System Power Limit Power Disconnect Method System Power Consumption
251. red user name and password to initiate an access request through the sending of an EAPOL Start packet to the switch The 802 1X client program then forwards the packet to the switch to start the authentication process 2 Upon receiving the authentication request packet the switch sends an EAP Request Identity packet to ask the 802 1X client program for the user name 3 The 802 1X client program responds by sending an EAP Response Identity packet to the switch with the user name included The switch then encapsulates the packet in a RADIUS Access Request packet and forwards it to the RADIUS server 4 Upon receiving the user name from the switch the RADIUS server retrieves the user name 168 finds the corresponding password by matching the user name in its database encrypts the password using a randomly generated key and sends the key to the switch through an RADIUS Access Challenge packet The switch then sends the key to the 802 1X client program 5 Upon receiving the key encapsulated in an EAP Request MD5 Challenge packet from the switch the client program encrypts the password of the supplicant system with the key and sends the encrypted password contained in an EAP Response MD5 Challenge packet to the RADIUS server through the switch The encryption is irreversible 6 The RADIUS server compares the received encrypted password contained in a RADIUS Access Request packet with the locally encrypted password If the two match
252. ree network to prevent packets from being duplicated and forwarded endlessly in the network BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit is the protocol data that STP and RSTP use Enough information is carried in BPDU to ensure the spanning tree generation STP is to determine the topology of the network via transferring BPDUs between devices To implement spanning tree function the switches in the network transfer BPDUs between each other to exchange information and all the switches supporting STP receive and process the received BPDUs BPDUs carry the information that is needed for switches to figure out the spanning tree gt STP Elements Bridge ID Bridge Identifier Indicates the value of the priority and MAC address of the bridge Bridge ID can be configured and the switch with the lower bridge ID has the higher priority Root Bridge Indicates the switch has the lowest bridge ID Configure the best PC in the ring network as the root bridge to ensure best network performance and reliability Designated Bridge Indicates the switch has the lowest path cost from the switch to the root bridge in each network segment BPDUs are forwarded to the network segment through the designated bridge The switch with the lowest bridge ID will be chosen as the designated bridge Root Path Cost Indicates the sum of the path cost of the root port and the path cost of all the switches that packets pass through The root path cost of the root bridge is 0 Brid
253. ress 192 168 0 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway MAC Address 00 14 78 00 00 32 System Time 2006 01 01 08 00 46 Run Time 0 day 0 hour 0 min 55 sec Figure 4 1 System Summary gt Port Status bts Indicates the 1000Mbps port is not connected to a device rim Indicates the 1000Mbps port is at the speed of 1000Mbps bind Indicates the 1000Mbps port is at the speed of 10Mbps or 100Mbps 12 Indicates the SFP port is not connected to a device Indicates the SFP port is at the speed of 1000Mbps ol Indicates the SFP port is at the speed of 100Mbps When the cursor moves on the port the detailed information of the port will be displayed Port 23 Type 1000M RJ45 Speed 100M FullDuplex Status Connected Enable Figure 4 2 Port Information gt Port Info Port Displays the port number of the switch Type Displays the type of the port Rate Displays the maximum transmission rate of the port Status Displays the connection status of the port Click a port to display the bandwidth utilization on this port The actual rate divided by theoretical maximum rate is the bandwidth utilization Figure 4 3 displays the bandwidth utilization monitored every four seconds Monitoring the bandwidth utilization on each port facilitates you to monitor the network traffic and analyze the network abnormities Run Time 20sec Current Port 6 Current Utilization 0 0 Graphic Example A Rx A Tx Figure 4 3 Bandwid
254. rform authentication and authorization To ensure a stable authentication system an alternate authentication server can be specified If the main authentication server is in trouble the alternate authentication server can substitute it to provide normal authentication service The Mechanism of an 802 1X Authentication System IEEE 802 1X authentication system uses EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol to exchange information between the supplicant system and the authentication server 1 2 3 EAP protocol packets transmitted between the supplicant system and the authenticator system are encapsulated as EAPOL packets EAP protocol packets transmitted between the authenticator system and the RADIUS server can either be encapsulated as EAPOR EAP over RADIUS packets or be terminated at authenticator system and the authenticator system then communicate with RADIUS servers through PAP Password Authentication Protocol or CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol protocol packets When a supplicant system passes the authentication the authentication server passes the information about the supplicant system to the authenticator system The authenticator system in turn determines the state authorized or unauthorized of the controlled port according to the instructions accept or reject received from the RADIUS server 167 gt 802 1X Authentication Procedure An 802 1X authentication can be initiated by supplicant sy
255. ries including basic management TLV and Organizationally specific TLV 1 Basic Management TLV A set of TLVs considered to be basic to the management of the network stations are required for all LLDP implementations 2 Organizationally Specific TLV Different organizations have defined various TLVs For instance Port VLAN ID TLV Port and Protocol VLAN ID TLV VLAN Name TLV And Protocol Identity TLV are defined by IEEE 802 1 while MAC PHY Configuration Status TLV Power Via MDI TLV Link Aggregation TLV and Maximum Frame TLV are defined by IEEE 802 3 Some specific TLVs are for LLDP MED protocol such as LLDP MED Capabilities TLV Network Policy TLV Extended Power via MDI TLV Hardware Revision TLV and so on 193 Gan ote For detailed introduction of TLV please refer to IEEE 802 1AB standard and ANSI TIA 1057 In TP LINK Switch the following LLDP optional TLVs are supported Port Description TLV The Port Description TLV allows network management to advertise the IEEE 802 LAN station s port description System Capabilities TLV The System Capabilities TLV identifies the primary functions of the system and whether or not these primary functions are enabled System Description TLV The System Description TLV allows network management to advertise the system s description which should include the full name and version identification of the system s hardware type software operating system and networking software
256. rotocol Template Table Select ID Protocol Name Ether Type Frame Type O 1 IP 0800 Ethernet II O 2 ARP 0806 Ethernet II O 3 RARP 0835 Ethernet Il O 4 IPX 8137 SNAP O 5 AT 8098 SNAP m Figure 6 10 Create and View Protocol Template The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Create Protocol Template Protocol Name Give a name for the Protocol Template Ether Type Enter the Ethernet protocol type field in the protocol template Frame Type Select a Frame Type for the Protocol Template gt Protocol Template Table Select Select the desired entry It is multi optional ID Displays the index of the protocol template Protocol Name Displays the name of the protocol template Ether Type Displays the Ethernet protocol type field in the protocol template Frame Type Displays the Frame type field for the protocol template n ote The Protocol Template bound to VLAN can not be deleted Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Set the link type for port Required On the VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Port Config page set the link type for the port based on its connected device 64 Create VLAN Required On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page click the Create button to create a VLAN Enter the VLAN ID and the description for the VLAN Meanwhile specify its member ports Create Protocol Template Required On the VLAN gt Protocol VLAN Protocol Template page cre
257. rresponding static multicast IP It is multi optional Multicast IP Displays the multicast IP VLAN ID Displays the VLAN ID of the multicast group Forward Port Displays the forward port of the multicast group 8 3 Multicast Filter When IGMP Snooping is enabled you can specified the multicast IP range the ports can join so as 105 to restrict users ordering multicast programs via configuring multicast filter rules When applying for a multicast group the host will send IGMP report message After receiving the report message the switch will firstly check the multicast filter rules configured for the receiving port If the port can be added to the multicast group it will be added to the multicast address table if the port can not be added to the multicast group the switch will drop the IGMP report message In that way the multicast streams will not be transmitted to this port which allows you to control hosts joining the multicast group 8 3 1 IP Range On this page you can figure the desired IP ranges to be filtered Choose the menu Multicast Multicast Filter IP Range to load the following page Create IP Range IP Range ID 1 30 Start Multicast IP Format 225 0 0 1 End Multicast IP Format 225 0 0 1 IP Range Table IP Range ID Select IP Range ID Start Multicast IP End Multicast IP O Total IP Range 0 Figure 8 10 Multicast Filter The following entries are
258. rsa key 20100120 Key fingerprint ssh tsa 1023 38 cd 9e 1 4 da b1 6a 9e 2b ff 43 69 e5 47 f4 60 Key comment rsa key 20100120 Key passphrase Confirm passphrase Actions Generate a public private key pair Generate Load an existing private key file Load Save the generated key Save public key Save private key Parameters Type of key to generate O SSH 1 RSA SSH 2 RSA O SSH 2 DSA Number of bits in a generated key 1024 3 On the Web management page of the switch download the public key file saved in the computer to the switch Key Download Choose the SSH public key file to download into switch Key Type SSH 2 RSAIDSA vw Anote 1 The key type should accord with the type of the key file 2 The SSH key downloading can not be interrupted 4 Download the private key file to SSH client software 28 Pageant Enter Pass Enter passphrase for key tsa key 20100120 a 5 After the public key and private key are downloaded please log on to the interface of PUTTY and enter the IP address for login X Pul TY Configuration Category B Session Basic options for your PuTTY session Logging Specify the destination you want to connect to Terminal Keyboard Host Name for IP address Port Bel 192 168 0 1 22 Features Connection type E Window OBaw O Iene O Rlogin SSH Serial Appearance Behaviour Tr
259. rt with TRUNK link type can be set as the GVRP application entity to maintain the VLAN registration information GVRP has the following three port registration modes Normal Fixed and Forbidden 70 Normal In this mode a port can dynamically register deregister a VLAN and propagate the dynamic static VLAN information Fixed In this mode a port cannot register deregister a VLAN dynamically It only propagates static VLAN information That is the port in Fixed mode only permits the packets of its static VLAN to pass Forbidden In this mode a port cannot register deregister VLANs It only propagates VLAN 1 information That is the port in Forbidden mode only permits the packets of the default VLAN namely VLAN 1 to pass Choose the menu VLAN GVRP to load the following page Global Config GVRP Enable Disable Port Config Port See oes O O O O ees es O Disable v Normal v EA O 1 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 A O 2 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 Fj 3 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 o 4 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 o 5 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 Fi 6 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 O E Disable Normal 1000 20 60 O 8 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 9 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 F 10 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 A o 11 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 F 12 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 F 13 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 Fj 14 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 o 15 Disable Normal 1000 20 60 v Figure 6 11 GVRP Config n ote If the GVRP
260. rvice in an IP header contains 8 bits The first three bits indicate IP precedence in the range of 0 to 7 RFC2474 re defines the ToS field in the IP packet header which is called the DS field The first six bits bit O bit 5 of the DS field indicate DSCP precedence in the range of 0 to 63 The last 2 bits bit 6 and bit 7 are reserved On the Web management page you can configure different DS field mapping to the corresponding priority levels Non IP datagram with 802 1Q tag are mapped to different priority levels based on 802 1P priority mode the untagged non IP datagram are mapped based on port priority mode gt Schedule Mode When the network is congested the problem that many packets compete for resources must be solved usually in the way of queue scheduling The switch implements four scheduling queues TCO TC1 TC2 and TC3 TCO has the lowest priority while TC3 has the highest priority The switch provides four schedule modes SP WRR SP WRR and Equ 1 SP Mode Strict Priority Mode In this mode the queue with higher priority will occupy the whole bandwidth Packets in the queue with lower priority are sent only when the queue with higher priority is empty The switch has four egress queues labeled as TCO TC1 TC2 and TC3 In SP mode their priorities increase in order TC3 has the highest priority The disadvantage of SP queue is that if there are packets in the queues with higher priority for a long time in congestion the packet
261. ry Power Priority Unknown Available Power Value Ow Figure 14 8 LLDP MED Local Information The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Refresh Rate gt Local Info Enable Disable the auto refresh function Specify the auto refresh rate Enter the desired port number and click Select to display the information of the corresponding port 14 4 4 Neighbor Info On this page you can get the LLDP MED information of the neighbors Choose the menu LLDP LLDP MED Neighbor Info to load the following page 204 Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Refresh Rate LLDP MED Neighbor Info Local Port Device Type Enable Disable sec 3 300 Pot o Application Type Location Data Format PowerType Information Figure 14 9 LLDP MED Neighbor Information The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Auto Refresh Auto Refresh Refresh Rate Neighbor Info Port Select Local Port Device Type Application Type Local Data Format Power Type Information Enable Disable the auto refresh function Specify the auto refresh rate Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Displays the local port number connecting to the neighbor device Displays the device type of the neighbor Displays the application type of the neighbor Application Type indicates the primary function of the app
262. s the PVID of each port indicating the default VLAN to which the port belongs is an important parameter with the following two purposes 1 2 When the switch receives an un VLAN tagged packet it will add a VLAN tag to the packet according to the PVID of its received port PVID determines the default broadcast domain of the port i e when the port receives UL packets or broadcast packets the port will broadcast the packets in its default VLAN Different packets tagged or untagged will be processed in different ways after being received by ports of different link types which is illustrated in the following table Receiving Packets Port Type Forwarding Packets Untagged Packets Tagged Packets If the VID of packet is the same as the PVID of the port the packet will be received The packet will be Access forwarded after removing its If the VID of packet is VLAN tag not the same as the PVID of the port the packet will be dropped When untagged packets are received the port The packet will be Trunk will add the default forwarded with its current VLAN tag i e the VLAN tag PVID of the ingress If the VID of packet is port to the packets allowed by the port the If the egress rule of port is packet will be received TAG the packet will be If the VID of packet is forwarded with its current forbidden by the port VLAN tag General pace Mn Re If the egress rule of port is ropped
263. s Neighbors Detail 1 Enable 0 0 0 0 Detail 2 Enable 0 0 0 0 Detail 3 Enable 0 0 0 0 Detail 4 Enable 0 0 0 0 Detail 5 Enable 0 0 0 0 Detail 6 Enable 0 0 0 0 Detail 3 7 Enable 0 0 0 0 Detail 8 Enable 0 0 0 0 Detail 9 Enable 0 0 0 0 Detail 10 Enable 0 0 0 0 Detail 11 Enable 0 0 0 0 Detail 12 Enable 0 0 0 0 Detail v Figure 15 3 NDP Summary The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config NDP Displays the global NDP status enabled or disabled for the switch Aging Time Displays the period for the neighbor switch to keep the NDP packets from this switch Hello Time Displays the interval to send NDP packets gt Port Status Port Displays the port number of the switch NDP Displays the NDP status enabled or disabled for the current port Send NDP Packets Displays the count of currently sent NDP packets Receive NDP Packets Displays the count of currently received NDP packets Error NDP Packets Displays the count of currently received error NDP packets Neighbors Displays the count of the connected neighbors 209 Detail Click the Detail button to view the complete information collected for the port 15 1 3 NDP Config On this page you can configure the NDP function for the switch Choose the menu Cluster NDP NDP Config to load the following page Global Config NDP Aging Time Hello Time Port Config Select OOOOOOO0O00000 Port h 13 15 17 19 21 23
264. s displayed Global Config Cluster Enable Cluster Role Member Cluster Name hello Commander MAC O0 EB A5 C5 55 C0 Figure 15 10 Cluster Summary for Member Switch The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config Cluster Displays the cluster status enabled or disabled of the switch Cluster Role Displays the role the switch plays in the cluster Cluster Name Displays the name of the current cluster the switch belongs to Commander MAC Displays the MAC address of the commander switch e For an individual switch the following page is displayed Global Config Cluster Disable Cluster Role Individual Figure 15 11 Cluster Summary for Individual Switch The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config Cluster Displays the cluster status enabled or disabled of the switch Cluster Role Displays the role the switch plays in the cluster 15 3 2 Cluster Config On this page you can configure the status of the cluster the switch belongs to Choose the menu Cluster Cluster Cluster Config to load the following page 216 e Fora candidate switch the following page is displayed Current Role Role Candidate Role Change Role Change Individual Figure 15 12 Cluster Configuration for Candidate Switch The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Current Role Role Displays the role the current switch plays in the cluster gt Role Change Individual
265. s in the queues with lower priority will be starved to death because they are not served 111 Packets are mapped to different priority queues TC HIS ER Packets in TC3 are Packets sent via this interface i eso HN Ga a Ga Ea N ay E Egress interface i ot Sw GS LSS i a em T K a Gan Too Packets Y classification SP Mode Figure 9 4 SP Mode WRR Mode Weight Round Robin Mode In this mode packets in all the queues are sent in order based on the weight value for each queue and every queue can be assured of a certain service time The weight value indicates the occupied proportion of the resource WRR queue overcomes the disadvantage of SP queue that the packets in the queues with lower priority can not get service for a long time In WRR mode though the queues are scheduled in order the service time for each queue is not fixed that is to say if a queue is empty the next queue will be scheduled In this way the bandwidth resources are made full use of The default weight value ratio of TCO TC1 TC2 and TC3 is 1 2 4 8 Packets are mapped to different priority queues To cree i 4 Packets in TCO TC3 are Pot forwarded following the Packets sent via this interface bs ratio 1 2 4 8 GS r Gattis KO i Egress interface aa a A asas a as Saa a WO a Ma cor o i Packets WRR Mode classification Weight value TC0 TC1 TC2 TC3 1 2 4 8 Figure 9 5 WRR Mod
266. s on the port LED is indicating the data transmission rate When the PoE LED is on the port LED is indicating the power supply status By default the Speed LED is on Pressing the mode switch button the Speed LED will turn off and the PoE LED will light up Then the PoE LED will turn off after being on for 60 seconds and the Speed LED will light up again When the Speed LED is on the port LED is indicating the data transmission rate LED Status Indication On The Switch is powered on Power Off The Switch is powered off or power supply is abnormal Flashing Power supply is abnormal System Flashing The Switch works properly On Off The Switch works improperly On A 1000 Mbps device is connected to the corresponding port but no Green activity 10 100 Flashing Data is being transmitted or received Pee A 10 100 Mbps device i ted to th di t but s device is connected to the corresponding port bu Mbps Yellow On aia p oP no activity Port LED Flashing Data is being transmitted or received Off No device is connected to the corresponding port When the PoE LED is on the port LED is indicating the power supply status LED Status Indication On The Switch is powered on Power Off The Switch is powered off or power supply is abnormal Flashing Power supply is abnormal Flashing The Switch works properly System On Off The Switch
267. s the higher priority Figure 16 4 Local Log The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Local Log Config Select Select the desired entry to configure the corresponding local log Log Buffer Indicates the RAM for saving system log The inforamtion in the log buffer is displayed on the Log Table page It will be lost when the switch is restarted Log File Indicates the flash sector for saving system log The inforamtion in the log file will not be lost after the switch is restarted and can be exported on the Backup Log page Severity Specify the severity level of the log information output to each channel Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value will be output Status Enable Disable the channel 16 2 3 Remote Log Remote log feature enables the switch to send system logs to the Log Server Log Server is to centralize the system logs from various devices for the administrator to monitor and manage the whole network Choose the menu Maintenance Log Remote Log to load the following page 225 Log Host Select Index Host IP UDP Part Severity Status dl v v O 1 0 0 0 0 514 level_6 Disable O 2 0 0 0 0 514 level_6 Disable O 3 0 0 0 0 514 level_6 Disable O 4 0 0 0 0 514 level_6 Disable Note 1 Up to 4 log hosts are supported 2 There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0 7 The smaller value has the higher priority Figure 16 5 Log Host The followi
268. ser Config The following entries are displayed on this screen gt User Info User Name Access Level User Status Password Confirm Password User Table Select User ID Name Access Level and status Operation Create a name for users login Select the access level to login e Admin Admin can edit modify and view all the settings of different functions e Guest Guest only can view the settings without the right to edit and modify Select Enable Disable the user configuration Type a password for users login Retype the password Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding user information It is multi optional The current user information can t be deleted Displays the current user ID user name access level and user status Click the Edit button of the desired entry and you can edit the corresponding user information After modifying the settings please click the Modify button to make the modification effective Access level and user status of the current user information can t be modified 18 4 3 System Tools The System Tools function allowing you to manage the configuration file of the switch can be implemented on Config Restore Config Backup Firmware Upgrade System Reboot and System Reset pages 4 3 1 Config Restore On this page you can upload a backup configuration file to restore your switch to this previous configuration Choose the menu System Sy
269. set to 1 NULL Scan Attack The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP index and all the control fields set to 0 During the TCP connection and data transmission the packets with all the control fields set to 0 are considered as the illegal packets SYN packet with its source port less than 1024 The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP SYN field set to 1 and source port less than 1024 Blat Attack The attacker sends the illegal packet with its source port and destination port on Layer 4 the same and its URG field set to 1 Similar to the Land Attack the system performance of the attacked Host is reduced since the Host circularly attempts to build a connection with the attacker Ping Flooding The attacker floods the destination system with Ping broadcast storm packets to forbid the system to respond to the legal communication SYN SYN ACK Flooding The attacker uses a fake IP address to send TCP request packets to the Server Upon receiving the request packets the Server responds with SYN ACK packets Since the IP address is fake no response will be returned The Server will keep on sending SYN ACK packets If the attacker sends overflowing fake request packets the network resource will be occupied maliciously and the requests of the legal clients will be denied Table 12 1 Defendable DoS Attack Types On this page you can enable the DoS Defend type appropriate to your need Choose the
270. ssage e Leave Timer When a GARP entity expects to deregister a piece of attribute information it sends out a Leave message Any GARP entity receiving this message starts its Leave timer and deregisters the attribute information if it does not receives a Join message again before the timer times out e LeaveAll Timer Once a GARP entity starts up it starts the LeaveAll timer and sends out a LeaveALL message after the timer times out so that other GARP entities can re register all the attribute information on this entity After that the entity restarts the LeaveAll timer to begin a new cycle gt GVRP GVRP as an implementation of GARP maintains dynamic VLAN registration information and propagates the information to other switches by adopting the same mechanism of GARP After the GVRP feature is enabled on a switch the switch receives the VLAN registration information from other switches to dynamically update the local VLAN registration information including VLAN members ports through which the VLAN members can be reached and so on The switch also propagates the local VLAN registration information to other switches so that all the switching devices in the same switched network can have the same VLAN information The VLAN registration information includes not only the static registration information configured locally but also the dynamic registration information which is received from other switches In this switch only the po
271. status configuration Port Displays the port number of the switch NTDP Displays NTDP status enabled or disabled of the current port Enable Click the Enable button to enable NTDP feature for the port you select Disable Click the Disable button to disable NTDP feature for the port you select aan ote NTDP function is effective only when NTDP function is enabled globally and for the port 15 3 Cluster A commander switch can recognize and add the candidate switch to a cluster automatically based on NDP and NTDP You can manually add the candidate switch to a cluster If the candidate switch is successfully added to the cluster it will get a private IP address assigned by the commander switch You can manage and configure the member switch via the commander switch The Cluster function can be implemented on Cluster Summary and Cluster Config pages 15 3 1 Cluster Summary On this page you can view the status of the current cluster Choose the menu Cluster Cluster Cluster Summary to load the following page e Fora candidate switch the following page is displayed Global Config Cluster Enable Cluster Role Candidate Figure 15 9 Cluster Summary for Candidate Switch The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Cluster Displays the cluster status enabled or disabled of the switch Cluster Role Displays the role the switch plays in the cluster 215 e For a member switch the following page i
272. stem Tools Config Restore to load the following page Config Restore Restore the config from the saved config file Select a backup config file and click the Restore Config button and then you can restore to the previous config Config file Browse Note It will take a long time to restore the config file Please wait without any operation Figure 4 9 Config Restore The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Config Restore Restore Config Click the Restore Config button to restore the backup configuration file It will take effect after the switch automatically reboots aan ote 1 It will take a few minutes to restore the configuration Please wait without any operation 2 To avoid any damage please don t power down the switch while being restored 3 After being restored the current settings of the switch will be lost Wrong uploaded configuration file may cause the switch unmanaged 4 3 2 Config Backup On this page you can download the current configuration and save it as a file to your computer for your future configuration restore Choose the menu System System Tools gt Config Backup to load the following page 19 Config Backup Backup System Config Click the button Backup Config you can save the config to you computer Note It will take a long time to backup the config file Please wait without any operation Figure 4 10 Config Backup The following entries are d
273. stem or authenticator system When the authenticator system detects an unauthenticated supplicant in LAN it will initiate the 802 1X authentication by sending EAP Request Identity packets to the supplicant The supplicant system can also launch an 802 1X client program to initiate an 802 1X authentication through the sending of an EAPOL Start packet to the switch This TP LINK switch can authenticate supplicant systems in EAP relay mode or EAP terminating mode The following illustration of these two modes will take the 802 1X authentication procedure initiated by the supplicant system for example 1 EAP Relay Mode This mode is defined in 802 1X In this mode EAP packets are encapsulated in higher level protocol such as EAPOR packets to allow them successfully reach the authentication server This mode normally requires the RADIUS server to support the two fields of EAP the EAP message field and the Message authenticator field This switch supports EAP MD5 authentication way for the EAP relay mode The following figure describes the basic EAP MD5 authentication procedure Supplicant System Switch EAPOL Start Authentication Server EAP Request ldentity EAP Response ldentity RADIUS Access Request RADIUS Access Challenge EAP Request EAP Response RADIUS Access Request RADIUS Access Accept EAP Success Figure 12 18 EAP MD5 Authentication Procedure 1 A supplicant system launches an 802 1X client program via its registe
274. stream TRUNK Supported The default VLAN of the port should be voice VLAN GENERAL Supported The default VLAN of the port can noe be voice VLAN and the egress rule of the access port in the default VLAN should be TAG UNTAG voice ACCESS Supported stream TRUNK Not supported GENERAL Supported The default VLAN of the port can noe be voice VLAN and the egress rule of the access port in the default VLAN should be UNTAG Table 9 2 Port voice VLAN mode and voice stream processing mode gt Security Mode of Voice VLAN When voice VLAN is enabled for a port you can configure its security mode to filter data stream If security mode is enabled the port just forwards voice packets and discards other packets whose source MAC addresses do not match OUI addresses If security mode is not enabled the port forwards all the packets Security Mode Packet Type Processing Mode UNTAG packet When the source MAC address of the packet is the OUI address that can be identified the packet can Packet with voice VLAN TAG be transmitted in the voice VLAN Otherwise the packet will be discarded Enable The processing mode for the device to deal with the packet is determined by whether the port O permits the VLAN or not independent of voice VLAN security mode UNTAG packet Do not check the source MAC address of the packet and all the packets can be transmitted in the Packet with voice VLAN TAG voice VL
275. t Port Config page configure the link type of Port 11 and Port 13 as ACCESS and configure the link type of Port 12 as GENERAL 68 2 Create VLAN10 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLANID as 10 owning Port 12 and Port 13 and configure the egress rule of Port 12 as Untag 3 Create VLAN20 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLANID as 20 owning Port 11 and Port 12 and configure the egress rule of Port 12 as Untag e Configure Switch B Step Operation Description 1 Configure the Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page configure the Link Type of the link type of Port 4 and Port 5 as ACCESS and configure the link type of ports Port 3 as GENERAL 2 Create VLAN10 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLANID as 10 owning Port 3 and Port 4 and configure the egress rule of Port 3 as Untag 3 Create VLAN20 Required On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page create a VLAN with its VLANID as 20 owning Port 3 and Port 5 and configure the egress rule of Port 3 as Untag 4 Create Protocol Required On VLAN gt Protocol VLAN gt Protocol Template page Template configure the protocol template practically E g the IP network packets are encapsulated in Ethernet Il format and its Ether Type is 0800 the AppleTalk network packets are encapsulated in SN
276. t packets to the switch via multicast and send the 802 1X authentication packets via unicast Obtain an IP address automatically Select this option if the Client automatically obtains the IP address from DHCP server After passing the authentication the Client can be assigned the IP address by DHCP server The Client can access the network after getting the new IP address Auto reconnect after timeout Select this option to allow the Client to automatically start the connection again when it does not receive the handshake reply packets from the switch within a 245 period 3 To continue click Connect button after entering the Name and Password on Figure D 12 Then the following screen will appear to prompt that the Radius server is being searched Connecting Searching the RADIUS server Figure D 14 Authentication Dialog 4 When passing the authentication the following screen will appear Connecting Successfully authenticated Network is 5 connected Figure D 15 Successfully Authenticated 5 Double click the icon on the right corner of desktop and then the following connection status screen will pop up Connection status Connection Status Connected Duration 00 00 26 Activities Received e Sent Packets 5 4 ciose0o Figure D 16 Connection Status 246 Q1 A1 Q2 A2 Q3 A3 FAQ Why does this error dialog box pop up when starting up the TP LINK 802 1X Client S
277. t priority is chosen as the root port of the switch 2 Using the root port BPDU and the root path cost the switch generates a designated port BPDU for each of its ports Root ID is replaced with that of the root port Root path is replaced with the sum of the root path cost of the root port and the path cost between this port and the root port The ID of the designated bridge is replaced with that of the switch The ID of the designated port is replaced with that of the port 3 The switch compares the resulting BPDU with the BPDU of the desired port whose role you want to determine If the resulting BPDU takes the precedence over the BPDU of the port the port is chosen as the designated port and the BPDU of this port is replaced with the resulting BPDU The port regularly sends out the resulting BPDU If the BPDU of this port takes the precedence over the resulting BPDU the BPDU of this port is not replaced and the port is blocked The port only can receive BPDUs Table 7 2 Selecting root port and designated port Tips In a STP with stable topology only the root port and designated port can forward data and the other ports are blocked The blocked ports only can receive BPDUs 75 RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol evolved from the 802 1D STP standard enable Ethernet ports to transit their states rapidly The premises for the port in the RSTP to transit its state rapidly are as follows e The
278. tallShield Wizard Preparing Setup Please wait while the InstallShield Wizard prepares the setup TpSupplicant 2 0 Setup is preparing the InstallShield Wizard which will guide you through the test of the setup process Please wait Cancel Figure D 2 Preparing Setup 3 Then the following screen will appear Click Next to continue If you want to stop the installation click Cancel 240 TpSupplicant Y2 0 InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for TpSupplicant Y2 0 The InstallShield Wizard will install TpSupplicant 2 0 on your computer To continue click Next Figure D 3 Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard 4 To continue choose the destination location for the installation files and click Next on the following screen TpSupplicant 2 0 InstallShield Wizard Choose Destination Location Select folder where setup will install files a Install TpSupplicant42 0 to C Program Files TP LINKAT pS upplicant V2 0 InstallShield Cancel Figure D 4 Choose Destination Location By default the installation files are saved on the Program Files folder of system disk Click the Change button to modify the destination location proper to your need 5 Till now The Wizard is ready to begin the installation Click Install to start the installation on the following screen 241 TpSupplicant 2 0 InstallShield Wizard Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to b
279. tch the IP address of your PC should be set in the same subnet addresses of the Switch The IP address is 192 168 0 x x is any number from 2 to 254 Subnet Mask is 255 255 255 0 For the detailed instructions as to how to do this please refer to Appendix B 2 After a moment a login window will appear as shown in Figure 3 2 Enter admin for the User Name and Password both in lower case letters Then click the Login button or press the Enter key UserName admin Password e Figure 3 2 Login 3 2 Configuration After a successful login the main page will appear as Figure 3 3 and you can configure the function by clicking the setup menu on the left side of the screen 10 TP LINK TL SG3424P System System Info User Manage System Summary Device Description System Time System IP 22F 24F 21F 23F System Tools Access Security System Info Switching System Description 24 Port Gigabit L2 Lite Managed PoE Switch with 4 Combo SFP Slots VLAN Device Name TL SG3424P Spanning Tree Device Location SHENZHEN Multicast System Contact ww tp link comn QoS Hardware Version TL 563424P 1 0 PoE Firmware Version 0 3 3 Build 20111215 Rel 39908 ACL IP Address 192 168 0 1 Network Security Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 SNMP Default Gateway LLDP MAC Address 00 1 4 78 00 00 32 Cluster System Time 2006 01 01 08 00 46 Maintenance Run Time 0 day 0 hour 0 min 55 sec
280. tees security because the multicast VLAN is isolated from user VLANS Before configuring a multicast VLAN you should firstly configure a VLAN as multicast VLAN and add the corresponding ports to the VLAN on the 802 1Q VLAN page If the multicast VLAN is enabled the multicast configuration for other VLANs on the VLAN Config page will be invalid that is the multicast streams will be transmitted only within the multicast VLAN Choose the menu Multicast gt IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN to load the following page 100 Multicast VLAN Multicast VLAN VLAN ID Router Port Time Member Port Time Leave Time Static Router Port Note Enable Disable 2 4094 sec 60 600 recommemed 300 Apply sec 60 600 recommemed 260 sec 1 30 recommemed 1 1 All IGMP packet will be processed in the Multicast VLAN after Multicast VLAN is created 2 The Multicast LAN won t take effect unless you first complete the configuration on the LAN Config page Figure 8 7 Multicast VLAN The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Multicast VLAN Multicast VLAN VLAN ID Router Port Time Member Port Time Leave Time Static Router Port n ote le Select Enable Disable Multicast VLAN feature Enter the VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN Specify the aging time of the router port Within this time if the switch doesn t receive IGMP query message from the router port
281. tems the same are considered to be the same Select the Security Model for the SNMP Group e v1 SNMPv1 is defined for the group In this model the Community Name is used for authentication SNMP v1 can be configured on the SNMP Community page directly e v2c SNMPv2c is defined for the group In this model the Community Name is used for authentication SNMP v2c can be configured on the SNMP Community page directly e v3 SNMPv3 is defined for the group In this model the USM mechanism is used for authentication If SNMPv3 is enabled the Security Level field is enabled for configuration Select the Security Level for the SNMP v3 Group e noAuthNoPriv No authentication and no privacy security levels are used e authNoPriv Only the authentication security level is used e authPriv Both the authentication and the privacy security levels are used Select the View to be the Read View The management access is restricted to read only and changes cannot be made to the assigned SNMP View 179 Write View Notify View Group Table Select Group Name Security Model Security Level Read View Write View Notify View Operation Select the View to be the Write View The management access is writing only and changes can be made to the assigned SNMP View The View defined both as the Read View and the Write View can be read and modified Select the View to be the Notify View The management station can rec
282. th Utilization gt Bandwidth Utilization 13 Rx Select Rx to display the bandwidth utilization of receiving packets on this port Tx Select Tx to display the bandwidth utilization of sending packets on this port 4 1 2 Device Description On this page you can configure the description of the switch including device name device location and system contact Choose the menu System System Info Device Description to load the following page Device Description Device Name TL SG3424P Device Location SHENZHEN Apply System Contact mer Ap link com Note The Device Name Location and Contact should be not more than 32 characters Figure 4 4 Device Description The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Device Description Device Name Enter the name of the switch Device Location Enter the location of the switch System Contact Enter your contact information 4 1 3 System Time System Time is the time displayed while the switch is running On this page you can configure the system time and the settings here will be used for other time based functions like ACL You can manually set the system time get GMT automatically if it has connected to a NTP server or synchronize with PC s clock as the system time Choose the menu System System Info System Time to load the following page 14 Time Info Current System Date 2006 01 01 08 02 44 Sunday Current Time Source Manual
283. that can configure and manage all the devices in a cluster It discovers and determins the candidate switches by collecting NDP Neighbor Discovery Protocol and NTDP Neighbor Topology Discovery Protocol Member Switch Indicates the device that is managed in a cluster Candidate Switch Indicates the device that does not belong to any cluster though it can be added to a cluster Individual Switch Indicates the device with cluster feature disabled The roles can be changed from one to anther following the specified rules 206 e The current switch you create cluster is specified as the commander switch e The commander switch discovers and determines candidate switches by collecting related information e After being added to the cluster the candidate switch becomes to be the member switch e After being removed from the cluster the member switch becomes to be the candidate switch e The commander switch becomes to be the candidate switch only when the cluster is deleted An ote TL SG424P Switch cannot be configured as commander switch to manage the cluster gt Introduction to Cluster Cluster functions to configure and manage the switches in the cluster based on three protocols NDP NTDP and CMP Cluster Management Protocol e NDP All switches get neighbor information by collecting NDP e NTDP The commander switch collects the NDP information and neighboring connection information of each device in a specific network
284. the BOOTP Server Enter the ID of management VLAN the only VLAN through which you can get access to the switch By default VLAN1 owning all the ports is the Management VLAN and you can access the switch via any port on the switch However if another VLAN is created and set to be the Management VLAN you may have to reconnect the management station to a port that is a member of the Management VLAN Enter the system IP of the switch The default system IP is 192 168 0 1 and you can change it appropriate to your needs 16 Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of the switch Default Gateway Enter the default gateway of the switch aan ote 1 5 Changing the IP address to a different IP segment will interrupt the network communication so please keep the new IP address in the same IP segment with the local network The switch only possesses an IP address The IP address configured will replace the original IP address If the switch gets the IP address from DHCP server you can see the configuration of the switch in the DHCP server if DHCP option is selected but no DHCP server exists in the network the switch will keep obtaining IP address from DHCP server until success If DHCP or BOOTP option is selected the switch will get network parameters dynamically from the Internet so IP address subnet mask and default gateway can not be configured By default the default IP address is 192 168 0 1 4 2 User Manage User Manage
285. the following page Rate Limit Config Port Select Port Ingress Rate Kbps Egress Rate Kbps LAG O 128 v 1024 v O 1 if O 2 z z O 3 O 4 ER Z e o 5 O 6 S O 7 ES z x o a O E O 10 O 11 O 12 v Note 1 For one port you cannot enable the Storm Control and the Ingress rate control atthe same time 2 Ifyou select Manual to set Ingress Egress rate the system will automatically select integral multiple of 64Kbps that closest to the rate you entered as the real Ingress Egress rate Figure 9 10 Rate Limit The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Rate Limit Config Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select Select the desired port for Rate configuration It is multi optional Port Displays the port number of the Switch 117 Ingress Rate Kbps Configure the bandwidth for receiving packets on the port You can select a rate from the dropdown list or select Manual to set Ingress rate the system will automatically select integral multiple of 64Kbps that closest to the rate you entered as the real Ingress rate Egress Rate Kbps Configure the bandwidth for sending packets on the port You can select a rate from the dropdown list or select Manual to set Egress rate the system will automatically select integral multiple of 6
286. the switch icon to view its detailed information click the switch icon and click the Manage button to log on to the Web management page Return to CONTENTS 220 Chapter 16 Maintenance Maintenance module assembling the commonly used system tools to manage the switch provides the convenient method to locate and solve the network problem 1 System Monitor Monitor the utilization status of the memory and the CPU of switch 2 Log View the configuration parameters of the switch and find out the errors via the Logs 3 Cable Test Test the connection status of the cable to locate and diagnose the trouble spot of the network 4 Loopback Test whether the ports of the switch and its peer device are available 5 Network Diagnose Test whether the destination device is reachable and detect the route hops from the switch to the destination device 16 1 System Monitor System Monitor functions to display the utilization status of the memory and the CPU of switch via the data graph The CPU utilization rate and the memory utilization rate should fluctuate stably around a specific value If the CPU utilization rate or the memory utilization rate increases markedly please detect whether the network is being attacked The System Monitor function is implemented on the CPU Monitor and Memory Monitor pages 16 1 1 CPU Monitor Choose the menu Maintenance gt System Monitor CPU Monitor to load the following page 221 CPU Mon
287. thing wrong with the firmware of the switch and the switch can not be launched you can load the software to the switch via FTP function FTP File Transfer Protocol a protocol in the application layer is mainly used to transfer files between the remote server and the local PCs It is a common protocol used in the IP network for files transfer 1 Hardware Installation Console port PC Switch FTP Server Figure C 1 1 Connect FTP server to port 1 of the switch 2 Connect the Console port of the PC to the switch 3 Save the firmware of the switch in the shared file of FTP server Please write down the user name password and the firmware name 2 Configure the Hyper Terminal After the hardware installation please take the following steps to configure the hyper terminal of the management PC to manage the switch 1 Select Start All Programs Accessories Communications Hyper Terminal to open hyper terminal 235 Set Program Access and Defaults W Windows Catalog Windows Update E Program Updates E Accessibility Games Startup Entertainment Network Connections e inteme plorer 3 Internet Explorer I System Tools 92 Network Setup Wizard Ww msn QJ Address Book E New Connection Wizard 109 E mail Microsoft Office Outl a Notepad jes Command Prompt C OvisLink Wireless Clig Utility Yi Windows Media Play Y Paint All Programs
288. tion before upgrading 4 3 4 System Reboot On this page you can reboot the switch and return to the login page Please save the current configuration before rebooting to avoid loosing the configuration unsaved Choose the menu System System Tools gt System Reboot to load the following page System Reboot Save Config Reboot Note To avoid damage please dontturn off the device while rebooting Figure 4 12 System Reboot aan ote To avoid damage please don t turn off the device while rebooting 4 3 5 System Reset On this page you can reset the switch to the default All the settings will be cleared after the switch is reset Choose the menu System System Tools gt System Reset to load the following page System Reset Reset Note The System Reset option will restore the configuration to default and your current settings will be lost Figure 4 13 System Reset Mnote After the system is reset the switch will be reset to the default and all the settings will be cleared 4 4 Access Security Access Security provides different security measures for the remote login so as to enhance the configuration management security It can be implemented on Access Control SSL Config and SSH Config pages 4 4 1 Access Control On this page you can control the users logging on to the Web management page to enhance the configuration management security The definitions of Admin and Guest refer to 1 2 User Manage 21
289. together to make a single high bandwidth data path so as to implement the traffic load sharing among the member ports in the group and to enhance the connection reliability For the member ports in an aggregation group their basic configuration must be the same The basic configuration includes STP QoS GVRP VLAN port attributes MAC Address Learning mode and other associated settings The further explains are following e If the ports which are enabled for the GVRP 802 1Q VLAN Voice VLAN STP QoS DHCP Snooping and Port Configuration Speed and Duplex Flow Control are in a LAG their configurations should be the same e The ports which are enabled for the Port Security Port Mirror MAC Address Filtering Static MAC Address Binding and 802 1X Authentication can not be added to the LAG e lt s not suggested to add the ports with ARP Inspection and DoS Defend enabled to the LAG If the LAG is needed you are suggested to configure the LAG function here before configuring the other functions for the member ports Tips 1 Calculate the bandwidth for a LAG If a LAG consists of the four ports in the speed of 1000Mbps Full Duplex the whole bandwidth of the LAG is up to 8000Mbps 2000Mbps 4 because the bandwidth of each member port is 2000Mbps counting the up linked speed of 1000Mbps and the down linked speed of 1000Mbps 2 The traffic load of the LAG will be balanced among the ports according to the Aggregate Arithmetic
290. tomatically over a Spanning Tree network Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP The GARP provides a generic attribute dissemination capability that is used by participants in GARP Applications GARP Participants to register and de register attribute values with other GARP Participants within a Bridged LAN The definition of the attribute types the values that they can carry and the semantics that are associated with those values when registered are specific to the operation of the GARP Application concerned Generic Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP 248 GMRP allows network devices to register end stations with multicast groups GMRP requires that any participating network devices or end stations comply with the IEEE 802 1p standard Group Attribute Registration Protocol GARP See Generic Attribute Registration Protocol IEEE 802 1D Specifies a general method for the operation of MAC bridges including the Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Tagging Defines Ethernet frame tags which carry VLAN information It allows switches to assign endstations to different virtual LANs and defines a standard way for VLANs to communicate across switched networks IEEE 802 1p An IEEE standard for providing quality of service QoS in Ethernet networks The standard uses packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches to transmit packets based on the tagged priority value IEEE 802 1X Port Authentic
291. tree instance Only one switch can be the root bridge in each spanning tree instance On this page you can globally configure the spanning tree function and related parameters Choose the menu Spanning Tree STP Config STP Config to load the following page Global Config STP Enable Disable Apply version STP Parameters Config CIST Priority 32768 0 61440 Hello Time 2 sec 1 10 Max Age 120 sec 6 40 a Apply Forward Delay 15 sec 4 30 pa Help TxHoldCount 5 pps 1 20 Max Hops 120 hop 1 40 Figure 7 4 STP Config 78 The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Global Config STP Select Enable Disable STP function globally on the switch Version Select the desired STP version on the switch e STP Spanning Tree Protocol e RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol e MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Parameters Config CIST Priority Enter a value from 0 to 61440 to specify the priority of the switch for comparison in the CIST CIST priority is an important criterion on determining the root bridge In the same condition the switch with the highest priority will be chosen as the root bridge The lower value has the higher priority The default value is 32768 and should be exact divisor of 4096 Hello Time Enter a value from 1 to 10 in seconds to specify the interval to send BPDU packets It is used to test the links 2 Hello Time 1 lt Max Age The default value is
292. ttacks L2 L3 L4 Access Control Lists restrict untrusted access to the protected resource Provides SSHv1 v2 SSL 2 0 3 0 and TLS v1 for access encryption e Manageability IP Clustering provides high scalability and easy Single IP Management 6 Supports Telnet CLI SNMP v1 v2c v3 RMON and web access Port Mirroring enables monitoring selected ingress egress traffic 2 3 Appearance Description 2 3 1 Front Panel TP LINK TL 5G3424P 24 0 8 1012 04 10 de 20 Bm 2 900000000000 O pes eo00000000000 Oper Meta rosas S Stream Managed PoE Switch Figure 2 1 Front Panel The following parts are located on the front panel of the Switch gt 10 100 1000Mbps Ports Designed to connect to the device with a bandwidth of 10Mbps 100Mbps or 1000Mbps Each has a corresponding 1000Mbps LED gt SFP Ports Designed to install the SFP module An ote When using the SFP port with a 100M module or a gigabit module you need to configure its corresponding Speed and Duplex mode on Switching gt Port gt Port Config page For 100M module please select 100MFD while select 1000MFD for gigabit module By default the Speed and Duplex mode of SFP port is 1000MFD gt Console Port Designed to connect with the serial port of a computer or terminal for monitoring and configuring the Switch gt LEDs TL SG3424P has a LED mode switch button which is for switching the LED status indication When the Speed LED i
293. u QoS Voice VLAN gt Port Config to load the following page 122 Port Config Port Select Port Port Mode Security Mode Member State LAG O B O 1 Auto Disable Inactive A O 2 Auto Disable Inactive O 3 Auto Disable Inactive O 4 Auto Disable Inactive O 5 Auto Disable Inactive O 6 Auto Disable Inactive O 7 Auto Disable Inactive O 8 Auto Disable Inactive E O g Auto Disable Inactive O 10 Auto Disable Inactive O 11 Auto Disable Inactive O 12 Auto Disable Inactive O 13 Auto Disable Inactive O 14 Auto Disable Inactive v Figure 9 13 Port Config n ote To enable voice VLAN function for the LAG member port please ensure its member state accords with its port mode If a port is a member port of voice VLAN changing its port mode to be Auto will make the port leave the voice VLAN and will not join the voice VLAN automatically until it receives voice streams The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Port Config Port Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding port based on the port number you entered Select Select the desired port for voice VLAN configuration It is multi optional Port Displays the port number of the Switch Port Mode Select the mode for the port to join the voice VLAN Auto In this mode the switch automatically adds a port to the voice VLAN or removes a port from the voice VLA
294. umber of any VLAN the port belongs to e GENERAL The GENERAL port can be added in multiple VLANs and set various egress rules according to the different VLANs The default egress rule is UNTAG The PVID can be set as the VID number of any VLAN the port belongs to PVID Enter the PVID number of the port LAG Displays the LAG to which the port belongs VLAN Click the Detail button to view the information of the VLAN to which the port belongs Click the Detail button to view the information of the corresponding VLAN VLAN of Port 1 VLAN ID WLAN IB WLAN Description Operation 1 Default LAN Remove Note Total VLAN of Port 1 1 Figure 6 6 View the Current VLAN of Port The following entries are displayed on this screen gt VLAN of Port VLAN ID Select Click the Select button to quick select the corresponding entry based on the VLAN ID number you entered VLAN ID Displays the ID number of VLAN VLAN Description Displays the user defined description of VLAN Operation Allows you to remove the port from the current VLAN Configuration Procedure Step Operation Description 1 Set the link type for Required On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt Port Config page set port the link type for the port based on its connected device 57 2 Create VLAN Required On the VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN gt VLAN Config page click the Create button to create a VLAN Enter the VLAN ID and the description for the VLAN
295. ure the TCP IP correctly in Windows 2000 First make sure your Ethernet Adapter is working refer to the adapter s manual if necessary 1 On the Windows taskbar click the Start button and then click Control Panel 2 Click the Network and Internet Connections icon and then click on the Network Connections tab in the appearing window 3 Right click the icon that showed below select Properties on the prompt page LAN or High Speed Internet ocal 4rea Connection Connected Firewalled i A SES Disable Status Repair Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Delete Rename Properties Figure B 1 4 Inthe prompt page that showed below double click on the Internet Protocol TCP IP 232 4 Local Area Connection Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Unmstall Figure B 2 5 The following TCP IP Properties window will display and the IP Address tab is open on this window by default 233 Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties 192 168 0 241 192 168 0 1 Obtain DNS server address automatically 2 6 Select Use the following IP address And the following items will be available If the switch s IP address is 192 168 0 1 specify IP address as 192 168 0 x x is from 2 to 254 and the Subnet mask as 255 255 255 0 Now Click OK to save your settings Return to CONTENTS 234 Appendix C Load Software Using FTP If there is some
296. user name the randomly generated key and the supplicant system encrypted password to the RADIUS server for further authentication Whereas the randomly generated key in EAP MD5 relay mode is generated 169 by the authentication server and the switch is responsible to encapsulate the authentication packet and forward it to the RADIUS server gt 802 1X Timer In 802 1 x authentication the following timers are used to ensure that the supplicant system the switch and the RADIUS server interact in an orderly way 1 Supplicant system timer Supplicant Timeout This timer is triggered by the switch after the switch sends a request packet to a supplicant system The switch will resend the request packet to the supplicant system if the supplicant system fails to respond in the specified timeout period 2 RADIUS server timer Server Timeout This timer is triggered by the switch after the switch sends an authentication request packet to RADIUS server The switch will resend the authentication request packet if the RADIUS server fails to respond in the specified timeout period 3 Quiet period timer Quiet Period This timer sets the quiet period When a supplicant system fails to pass the authentication the switch quiets for the specified period before it processes another authentication request re initiated by the supplicant system gt Guest VLAN Guest VLAN function enables the supplicants that do not pass the authentication to
297. vity Device Refers to an LLDP MED Device that provides access to the IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP MED Endpoint Devices Bridge is a Network Connectivity Device Endpoint Device Refers to an LLDP MED Device at the network edge providing some aspects of IP communications service based on IEEE 802 LAN technology Endpoint Devices may be a member of any of the Endpoint Device Classes Endpoint Devices are composed of three defined Classes Class I Class II and Class Ill Generic Endpoint Device Class I The most basic class of Endpoint Device Media Endpoint Device Class Il The class of Endpoint Device that supports media stream capabilities Communication Device Endpoint Class Ill The class of Endpoint Device that directly supports end users of the IP communication system The following LLDP MED optional TLVs are supported in TL SG3424P Network Policy TLV The Network Policy TLV allows both Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints to advertise VLAN configuration and associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes that apply for a set of specific applications on that port 200 Location Identification TLV The Location Identification TLV provides for advertisement of location identifier information to Communication Endpoint Devices based on configuration of the Network Connectivity Device it s connected to You can set the Location Identification content in Location Identification Parameters If Location
298. work Diagram 102 Multicast Source User A gt Configuration Procedure Router Port 3 Switch Port 4 Port 5 VLAN4 VLANS lt User B Step 1 Create VLANs Operation Description Create three VLANs with the VLAN ID 3 4 and 5 respectively and specify the description of VLAN3 as Multicast VLAN on VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN page 2 Configure ports On VLAN gt 802 1Q VLAN function pages For port 3 configure its link type as GENERAL and its egress rule as TAG and add it to VLAN3 VLAN4 and VLAN5 For port 4 configure its link type as GENERAL and its egress rule as UNTAG and add it to VLAN3 and VLAN 4 For port 5 configure its link type as GENERAL and its egress rule as UNTAG and add it to VLAN3 and VLAN 5 3 Enable IGMP Snooping function Enable IGMP Snooping function globally on Multicast IGMP Snooping Snooping Config page Enable IGMP Snooping function for port 3 port4 and port 5 on Multicast gt IGMP Snooping Port Config page 4 Enable VLAN Multicast Enable Multicast VLAN configure the VLAN ID of a multicast VLAN as 3 and keep the other parameters as default on Multicast IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN page 5 Check Multicast VLAN 3 5 and Multicast VLAN 3 will be displayed in the IGMP Snooping Status table on the Multicast IGMP Snooping Snooping Config page 8 2 Multicast IP In a network receivers can join different mult
299. work Diagram 218 Network administrator Cluster 175 128 0 1 255 255 255 0 Port 2 Port 1 Member switch 1 00 00 00 22 22 22 Network Port 3 Commander switch 00 00 00 11 11 11 Member switch 2 00 00 00 33 33 33 Figure 15 15 Network diagram gt Configuration Procedure e Configure the member switch Step Operation Description 1 Enable NDP function on the switch and for port 1 On Cluster gt NDP gt NDP Config page enable NDP function 2 Enable NTDP function on the switch and for port 1 On Cluster gt NTDP gt NTDP Config page enable NTDP function e Configure the commander switch Step Operation Description 1 Enable NDP function on the switch and for port 1 port 2 and port 3 On Cluster NDP NDP Config page enable NDP function 2 Enable NTDP function on the switch and for port 1 port 2 and port 3 On Cluster gt NTDP gt NTDP Config page enable NTDP function 3 Create a cluster and configure the related parameters On Cluster Cluster Cluster Config page configure the role as Commander and enter the related information IP pool 175 128 0 1 Mask 255 255 255 0 219 Configure the member switch On Cluster Cluster Member Config page select the member switch and click the Manage button to log on to its Web management page Or On Cluster Cluster Cluster Topology page double click
300. x Time Module Severity Content aan ote Displays the index of the log information Displays the time when the log event occurs The log can get the correct time after you configure on the System gt System Info gt System Time Web management page Displays the module which the log information belongs to You can select a module from the drop down list to display the corresponding log information Displays the severity level of the log information You can select a severity level to display the log information whose severity level value is the same or smaller Displays the content of the log information 1 The logs are classified into eight levels based on severity The higher the information severity is the lower the corresponding level is 2 This page displays logs in the log buffer and at most 512 logs are displayed 224 16 2 2 Local Log Local Log is the log information saved in switch By default all system logs are saved in log buffer and the logs with severities from level_0 to level_4 are saved in log file meanwhile On this page you can set the output channel for logs Choose the menu Maintenance gt Log gt Local Log to load the following page Local Log Config Select Channel Severity Status o E E O Log Buffer level_7 Enable al Log File level_4 Enable Note 1 Local log includes 2 channels log buffer and log file 2 There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0 7 The smaller value ha
301. y Cooperates with the Power Disconnected Method to decide the way to supply power to the new linked PD Powered Device when the surplus power is inadequate The priority levels include High Middle and Low in descending order Power Limit Defines the max power the corresponding port can supply Class1 represents 4w Class2 represents 7w Class3 represents 15 4w and Class4 represents 30w gt PoE Profile Select Select the desired profile to delete Profile Name Displays the name of the profile PoE Status Displays the PoE status of the port in the profile PoE Priority Displays the PoE priority of the port in the profile Power Limit Displays the max power the port in the profile can supply 10 2 PoE Time Range A time range based PoE enables you to implement PoE power supply by differentiating the time ranges A time range can be specified for each port The port will not supply power when the specified time range is configured and the system time is not within the time range On this switch absolute time week time and holiday can be configured Configure an absolute time section in the form of the start date to the end date to make the port based on this time range supply power configure a week time section to make the port supply based on this time range on the fixed days of the week configure a holiday section and select Exclude Holiday to make the port based on this time range not supply power on some special days In
302. ys the Security Model of the User Displays the Security Level of the User Displays the Authentication Mode of the User Displays the Privacy Mode of the User Click the Edit button to modify the Group of the User and click the Modify button to apply The SNMP User and its Group should have the same Security Model and Security Level 13 1 5 SNMP Community SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c adopt community name authentication The community name can limit access to the SNMP agent from SNMP network management station functioning as a password If SNMP v1 or SNMP v2c is employed you can directly configure the SNMP Community on this page without configuring SNMP Group and User Choose the menu SNMP gt SNMP Config SNMP Community to load the following page Community Config Community Name 16 characters maximum Access read only x Clear MIB View viewDefault v Community Table Select Community Name Access MIB View Operation All Note The default MIB view of community is viewDefault Figure 13 7 SNMP Community The following entries are displayed on this screen gt Community Config Community Name Access Enter the Community Name here Defines the access rights of the community 182 MIB View gt Community Table Select Community Name Access MIB View Operation An ote e read only Management right of the Community is restricted to read only and changes cannot be made to th

TP-LINK TL-SG3424P network switch

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents